ValueSAP - Business BlueprintBusiness Blueprint

ASAP Business Blueprint

Implementation
Created by: Date of creation: Changed by: Date of the last changes: Version: Report select options:
answered Include CIT Project documentation ] [- All the questions - answered and un-

asap 7/22/2009

_______________

______________________

______________________

Sign Off Date

Signature Customer

Signature Consulting

File location: [C:\Asap\Projects\Implementation\QAdb\Reports\MasterData.doc]

ValueSAP -

Table of Contents
A. Master Data.................................................................................................................................. 12 1. General Master Records........................................................................................................ 12 1.1. Material Master................................................................................................................... 12 1.2. Material BOM...................................................................................................................... 16 1.3. Service Master.................................................................................................................... 19 1.4. Batch................................................................................................................................... 20 1.4.1. Batch Master.................................................................................................................... 20 1.4.2. Batch Search Strategy..................................................................................................... 23 1.5. Serial Numbers................................................................................................................... 24 1.6. Handling unit....................................................................................................................... 25 1.7. Work Center........................................................................................................................ 26 1.8. Customer Master Record.................................................................................................... 28 1.9. Vendor Master Record........................................................................................................ 31 1.10. Bank/Bank Directory TR/FI............................................................................................... 33 1.11. Taxes................................................................................................................................ 33 2. Product Data Management.................................................................................................... 33 2.1. Change master................................................................................................................... 33 2.2. ECR/ECO........................................................................................................................... 35 2.3. Leading change master record...........................................................................................35 2.4. Object management record................................................................................................ 36 2.5. Revision level...................................................................................................................... 36 2.6. Single Dependency............................................................................................................. 36 2.7. Configuration profile............................................................................................................ 37 3. Production Planning and Procurement Planning...................................................................37 3.1. Sales and Operations Planning..........................................................................................37 3.1.1. Product Group................................................................................................................. 37 3.1.2. Rough-cut Planning Profile..............................................................................................37 3.1.3. Information Structure....................................................................................................... 37 3.1.4. Planning hierarchy........................................................................................................... 38 3.1.5. Planning Type.................................................................................................................. 38 3.1.6. Planning Event................................................................................................................. 38 3.2. MRP/MPS/Long-Term Planning..........................................................................................38 3.2.1. BOM Explosion Number.................................................................................................. 38 3.2.2. Planning Calendar........................................................................................................... 38 3.2.3. Quota Arrangement......................................................................................................... 38 3.2.4. Production Lot.................................................................................................................. 39 4. Procurement.......................................................................................................................... 39 4.1. Manufacturer Part Number................................................................................................. 39 4.2. Conditions........................................................................................................................... 39 4.3. Source List.......................................................................................................................... 40 4.4. Quota Arrangement............................................................................................................ 41 4.5. Delivery Address................................................................................................................. 41 4.6. Vendor Rebate Arrangements............................................................................................42 4.7. Settlement Accounting for Conditions Requiring Subsequent Settlement...........................42 4.8. Release Strategy with Classification...................................................................................46 4.9. Vendor Evaluation............................................................................................................... 46 5. Production.............................................................................................................................. 47 5.1. Discrete Production............................................................................................................. 47 5.1.1. Production Version........................................................................................................... 47 5.1.2. Work Center..................................................................................................................... 47 5.1.2.1. Work Center.................................................................................................................. 47 5.1.2.2. Capacity 48 5.1.2.3. Shift Sequence............................................................................................................. 48 5.1.3. Routing............................................................................................................................ 48 5.1.3.1. Routings 48 5.1.3.2. Reference Operation Set..............................................................................................49 2 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 5.1.3.3. Production Resources and Tools..................................................................................50 5.1.3.4. Standard Trigger Point.................................................................................................. 50 5.1.4. CAPP Standard Values Calculation.................................................................................50 5.1.4.1. CAPP Formula.............................................................................................................. 50 5.2. Repetitive Manufacturing.................................................................................................... 51 5.2.1. Production Version........................................................................................................... 51 5.2.2. Product Cost Collectors................................................................................................... 51 5.2.3. Planning ID...................................................................................................................... 51 5.2.4. Line Design...................................................................................................................... 51 5.2.4.1. Rate Routing................................................................................................................. 51 5.2.4.2. Reference Rate Routing............................................................................................... 52 5.2.4.3. Line Hierarchy............................................................................................................... 53 5.3. Process Manufacturing....................................................................................................... 53 5.3.1. Production Version........................................................................................................... 53 5.3.2. Resource......................................................................................................................... 53 5.3.2.1. Resource 53 5.3.2.2. Capacity 54 5.3.2.3. Shift Sequence............................................................................................................. 54 5.3.3. Master Recipe.................................................................................................................. 55 5.3.3.1. Master Recipe............................................................................................................... 55 5.3.3.2. Production Resources and Tools..................................................................................57 5.4. KANBAN............................................................................................................................. 58 5.4.1. Supply Area..................................................................................................................... 58 5.4.2. Control Cycle................................................................................................................... 58 6. Sales and Distribution............................................................................................................ 58 6.1. Business Partner................................................................................................................. 58 6.1.1. Customer hierarchy.......................................................................................................... 58 6.2. Products.............................................................................................................................. 59 6.2.1. Material determination..................................................................................................... 59 6.2.2. Item proposal................................................................................................................... 60 6.2.3. Dynamic product proposal...............................................................................................60 6.2.4. Cross Selling.................................................................................................................... 60 6.2.5. Material Listing /Material Exclusion..................................................................................61 6.2.6. Value Contract Assortment module.................................................................................61 6.2.7. Product allocation............................................................................................................ 61 6.3. Assortment.......................................................................................................................... 61 6.3.1. Assortment Module Maintenance....................................................................................61 6.3.2. Product proposal processing...........................................................................................62 6.3.3. Assortment-Assortment User Assignment Maintenance..................................................62 6.4. Agreements........................................................................................................................ 62 6.4.1. Customer material information.........................................................................................62 6.4.2. Rebate Agreement........................................................................................................... 63 6.4.3. Marketing campaigns....................................................................................................... 63 6.4.4. Price Catalog................................................................................................................... 64 6.5. Conditions........................................................................................................................... 64 6.6. Output................................................................................................................................. 67 6.7. Transport............................................................................................................................ 68 6.7.1. Routes/Stages................................................................................................................. 68 6.7.2. Route schedule................................................................................................................ 68 6.7.3. Transportation connection point.......................................................................................68 7. Inventory Management, Warehouse Management and Transportation.................................69 7.1. Hazardous Material............................................................................................................. 69 7.2. Batch................................................................................................................................... 69 7.3. Batch Search Strategy........................................................................................................ 72 7.4. Control Cycle...................................................................................................................... 73 7.5. Serial Numbers................................................................................................................... 73 8. Customer Service.................................................................................................................. 74 8.1. Business Partner................................................................................................................. 74 8.1.1. Customer Hierarchy......................................................................................................... 74 8.2. Rebate Arrangements......................................................................................................... 75 3 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 8.2.1. Customer Material Information......................................................................................... 75 8.2.2. Conditions........................................................................................................................ 75 8.3. Products.............................................................................................................................. 78 8.3.1. Material Master: Service Product.....................................................................................78 8.4. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)........................................................80 8.4.1. Functional Location.......................................................................................................... 81 8.4.2. Equipment........................................................................................................................ 83 8.4.3. Fleet Object..................................................................................................................... 86 8.4.4. Bill of Material for Functional Location.............................................................................90 8.4.5. Equipment Bill of Material................................................................................................ 90 8.4.6. Installed Base.................................................................................................................. 91 8.4.7. Reference Functional Location........................................................................................ 92 8.5. Task Lists............................................................................................................................ 92 8.5.1. General Task List............................................................................................................. 93 8.6. Maintenance Plans and Service Agreements.....................................................................93 8.6.1. Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 94 8.6.2. Service Contract.............................................................................................................. 95 8.6.3. Single Cycle Plan............................................................................................................. 98 8.6.4. Multiple Counter Plan....................................................................................................... 99 8.6.5. Strategy Plan................................................................................................................... 100 8.7. Solution Database............................................................................................................... 100 8.7.1. Symptom.......................................................................................................................... 101 8.8. Additional Master Data........................................................................................................ 102 8.8.1. Counter/Measuring Point................................................................................................. 102 8.8.2. Catalog............................................................................................................................ 102 8.8.3. Permit 102 9. Plant Maintenance................................................................................................................. 103 9.1. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)........................................................103 9.1.1. Functional Location.......................................................................................................... 103 9.1.2. Equipment........................................................................................................................ 106 9.1.3. Fleet Object..................................................................................................................... 108 9.1.4. Production Resource/Tool as Equipment.........................................................................112 9.1.5. Reference Functional Location........................................................................................ 113 9.1.6. Bill of Material for Functional Location.............................................................................113 9.1.7. Equipment Bill of Material................................................................................................ 114 9.1.8. Object Link....................................................................................................................... 115 9.1.9. Installed Base.................................................................................................................. 115 9.2. Task Lists............................................................................................................................ 116 9.2.1. General Task List............................................................................................................. 116 9.3. Maintenance Plans............................................................................................................. 116 9.3.1. Single Cycle Plan............................................................................................................. 117 9.3.2. Multiple Counter Plan....................................................................................................... 117 9.3.3. Strategy Plan................................................................................................................... 118 9.4. Solution Database............................................................................................................... 119 9.4.1. Symptom.......................................................................................................................... 120 9.5. Additional Master Data........................................................................................................ 120 9.5.1. Warranty.......................................................................................................................... 120 9.5.2. Counter/Measuring Point................................................................................................. 121 9.5.3. Revision........................................................................................................................... 121 9.5.4. Catalog............................................................................................................................ 122 9.5.5. Permit 122 10. Quality Management............................................................................................................ 122 10.1. QM General...................................................................................................................... 122 10.1.1. Inspection Plan.............................................................................................................. 122 10.1.2. Work Center................................................................................................................... 123 10.1.3. Inspection Characteristic/Master Inspection Characteristic............................................123 10.1.4. Processing of General Characteristics...........................................................................124 10.1.5. Material Specification..................................................................................................... 124 10.1.6. Inspection Method.......................................................................................................... 125 10.1.7. Catalog.......................................................................................................................... 125 4 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 10.1.8. Selected Set.................................................................................................................. 125 10.1.9. Sampling Scheme.......................................................................................................... 126 10.1.10. Sampling Procedure.................................................................................................... 126 10.1.11. Dynamic Modification Rule.......................................................................................... 127 10.1.12. Sample-Drawing Procedure.........................................................................................127 10.1.13. Production Resources/Tools........................................................................................127 10.1.14. QM Order..................................................................................................................... 128 10.1.15. Archiving QM Objects.................................................................................................. 129 10.2. QM in Materials Management...........................................................................................129 10.2.1. Quality Info Record........................................................................................................ 129 10.3. QM in Production.............................................................................................................. 131 10.3.1. Routing.......................................................................................................................... 131 10.3.2. Master Recipe................................................................................................................ 132 10.4. QM in Sales and Distribution............................................................................................ 135 10.4.1. QM Control in Sales....................................................................................................... 135 10.5. QM in Plant Maintenance.................................................................................................. 135 10.5.1. Functional Location........................................................................................................ 135 10.5.2. Equipment...................................................................................................................... 138 10.5.3. Single Cycle Plan........................................................................................................... 141 10.5.4. Multiple Counter Plan..................................................................................................... 141 10.5.5. Strategy Plan................................................................................................................. 142 10.6. Solution Database............................................................................................................. 143 10.6.1. Symptom........................................................................................................................ 143 11. Environment, Health and Safety..........................................................................................144 11.1. Product Safety.................................................................................................................. 144 11.1.1. Substance...................................................................................................................... 144 11.1.2. Phrase........................................................................................................................... 146 11.1.3. Report............................................................................................................................ 146 11.2. Dangerous Goods Management.......................................................................................148 11.2.1. Dangerous Goods.......................................................................................................... 148 11.2.2. Phrase........................................................................................................................... 149 11.2.3. TREMcard...................................................................................................................... 150 11.2.4. Dangerous Goods Documents.......................................................................................150 11.3. Waste................................................................................................................................ 150 11.3.1. Waste Master................................................................................................................. 152 11.3.1.1. Material Master........................................................................................................... 152 11.3.1.2. Specifications.............................................................................................................. 152 11.3.1.3. Waste Code/Waste Catalog........................................................................................153 11.3.2. Waste Generator/Waste Disposer/Waste Transporter/Authority....................................153 11.3.3. Waste Approval............................................................................................................. 154 11.4. Industrial Hygiene and Safety........................................................................................... 155 11.4.1. Phrase........................................................................................................................... 157 11.4.2. Work Area...................................................................................................................... 158 11.4.3. Agent (Industrial Hygiene and Safety)...........................................................................158 11.4.4. Accident......................................................................................................................... 160 11.4.5. Safety Measures............................................................................................................ 161 11.4.6. Report............................................................................................................................ 161 11.5. Occupational Health.......................................................................................................... 161 11.5.1. Agent (Occupational Health)..........................................................................................163 11.5.2. Protocols........................................................................................................................ 164 11.5.3. Medical Examinations.................................................................................................... 165 11.5.4. Medical Tests................................................................................................................. 166 11.5.5. Questionnaire................................................................................................................ 166 11.5.6. Question Catalog........................................................................................................... 166 11.5.7. Diagnosis Key................................................................................................................ 166 11.5.8. Injury/Illness Log............................................................................................................ 167 11.5.9. Reports.......................................................................................................................... 167 12. Project Management............................................................................................................ 168 12.1. Standard structures........................................................................................................... 168 12.1.1. Standard milestone........................................................................................................ 168 5 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 12.1.2. Standard network........................................................................................................... 168 12.1.3. Standard WBS............................................................................................................... 168 12.2. General............................................................................................................................. 169 12.2.1. PS text........................................................................................................................... 169 12.2.2. Delivery information....................................................................................................... 169 12.2.3. Third Party Delivery Address.........................................................................................169 12.2.4. Project Classification...................................................................................................... 169 12.3. Project structure................................................................................................................ 170 12.3.1. Responsible cost center................................................................................................. 170 12.3.2. Requesting cost center.................................................................................................. 170 12.4. Work center...................................................................................................................... 170 13. Financial Accounting............................................................................................................ 171 13.1. G/L Account...................................................................................................................... 171 13.2. Ledger............................................................................................................................... 172 13.3. Legal Consolidation.......................................................................................................... 172 13.3.1. Item 172 13.3.2. Subitem.......................................................................................................................... 174 13.3.3. Sets (Namespace)......................................................................................................... 174 13.4. Funds Management.......................................................................................................... 174 13.4.1. Funds Center................................................................................................................. 176 13.4.2. Commitment Item........................................................................................................... 176 13.4.3. Fund 176 13.4.4. Application of Funds...................................................................................................... 178 14. Treasury............................................................................................................................... 178 14.1. General............................................................................................................................. 178 14.1.1. Business Partner............................................................................................................ 178 14.1.2. House Banks................................................................................................................. 179 14.1.3. Limits 179 14.2. Treasury Management...................................................................................................... 179 14.2.1. Class 179 14.2.2. Reference...................................................................................................................... 179 14.2.3. Securities Account......................................................................................................... 179 14.2.4. Position Indicator........................................................................................................... 180 14.2.5. Market Data................................................................................................................... 180 14.3. Loans................................................................................................................................ 180 14.3.1. Loan Products................................................................................................................ 180 14.3.2. Collateral........................................................................................................................ 181 14.3.3. Collateral Objects........................................................................................................... 181 14.3.4. Filed Documents............................................................................................................ 182 14.3.5. Condition Structure........................................................................................................ 182 14.4. Market Risk Management................................................................................................. 183 14.4.1. Reference Interest Rate................................................................................................. 183 14.4.2. Yield Curves.................................................................................................................. 183 14.4.3. Volatility......................................................................................................................... 183 14.4.4. Reporting....................................................................................................................... 183 14.4.5. Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions................................................................................184 14.4.6. Scenario......................................................................................................................... 184 14.4.7. Market Data Shift........................................................................................................... 184 14.4.8. Statistics Type............................................................................................................... 184 14.4.9. Correlation..................................................................................................................... 184 14.4.10. Risk Hierarchy............................................................................................................. 185 15. Revenue and Cost Controlling............................................................................................. 185 15.1. Overhead Cost Controlling................................................................................................ 185 15.1.1. Cost Element................................................................................................................. 185 15.1.1.1. Primary Cost Element.................................................................................................185 15.1.1.2. Secondary Cost Element............................................................................................ 185 15.1.1.3. Cost Element Group................................................................................................... 185 15.1.2. Cost Center.................................................................................................................... 185 15.1.2.1. Cost Center................................................................................................................. 185 15.1.2.2. Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers..........................................................................186 6 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 15.1.2.3. Cost Center Group...................................................................................................... 186 15.1.3. Activity Type.................................................................................................................. 186 15.1.3.1. Activity Type............................................................................................................... 186 15.1.3.2. Activity Type Group..................................................................................................... 186 15.1.4. Statistical Key Figures................................................................................................... 186 15.1.4.1. Statistical Key Figures................................................................................................ 186 15.1.4.2. Statistical Key Figure Group.......................................................................................186 15.1.5. Business Process.......................................................................................................... 187 15.1.5.1. Business Process....................................................................................................... 187 15.1.5.2. Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes...............................................................187 15.1.5.3. Business Process Group............................................................................................187 15.1.6. Internal Order................................................................................................................. 187 15.2. Product Cost Controlling................................................................................................... 188 15.2.1. Procurement Alternative................................................................................................188 15.2.2. Cost Component............................................................................................................ 188 15.2.3. Product Cost Collectors................................................................................................. 188 15.2.4. Material Ledger Data..................................................................................................... 189 15.3. Profitability Analysis.......................................................................................................... 189 15.3.1. Characteristics............................................................................................................... 189 15.3.1.1. Characteristic Definition.............................................................................................. 189 15.3.1.2. Characteristic Values.................................................................................................. 189 15.3.1.3. Characteristic Derivation.............................................................................................189 15.3.2. Value Fields................................................................................................................... 190 15.3.2.1. Definition of Value Fields............................................................................................ 190 15.3.3. Condition Types............................................................................................................. 190 15.3.3.1. Definition of Condition Types......................................................................................190 16. Enterprise Controlling.......................................................................................................... 190 16.1. Consolidation.................................................................................................................... 191 16.1.1. Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy......................................................191 16.1.2. Breakdown Categories................................................................................................... 192 16.1.3. Custom Characteristics.................................................................................................. 192 16.1.4. Subitem Category.......................................................................................................... 193 16.1.5. Subitem.......................................................................................................................... 193 16.1.6. Sets (Namespace)......................................................................................................... 193 17. Asset Accounting................................................................................................................. 193 18. Real Estate Management.................................................................................................... 195 18.1. Real Estate Objects.......................................................................................................... 195 18.1.1. Business Entity.............................................................................................................. 195 18.1.2. Property......................................................................................................................... 198 18.1.3. Building.......................................................................................................................... 200 18.1.4. Rental Unit..................................................................................................................... 203 18.1.5. Rooms........................................................................................................................... 208 18.1.6. Land Register................................................................................................................ 209 18.1.7. Correction Items (Germany).......................................................................................... 210 18.1.8. Participation ID.............................................................................................................. 211 18.1.9. Settlement Unit.............................................................................................................. 211 18.1.10. Master Settlement Unit................................................................................................ 212 18.1.11. Heating System............................................................................................................ 213 18.2. Partner.............................................................................................................................. 213 18.2.1. Business Partner Real Estate........................................................................................213 19. Personnel Administration..................................................................................................... 216 19.1. Bases................................................................................................................................ 216 19.2. Employee's Personal Details............................................................................................216 19.2.1. Personal Data................................................................................................................ 216 19.2.2. Challenge....................................................................................................................... 217 19.2.3. Addresses...................................................................................................................... 217 19.2.4. Bank Details................................................................................................................... 217 19.2.5. Family/Related Persons................................................................................................. 217 19.2.6. Education and Training.................................................................................................. 217 19.2.7. Other/Previous Employers.............................................................................................218 7 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 19.2.8. Qualifications................................................................................................................. 218 19.2.9. Appraisals...................................................................................................................... 218 19.2.10. Membership Fees........................................................................................................ 218 19.2.11. Communications Data.................................................................................................. 219 19.2.12. Stat.of Res.Perm. CH.................................................................................................. 219 19.2.13. Registration of country of birth (act stim.lab.part.ethn.minorities) NL...........................219 19.2.14. Additional Personal Data CA, SG, US.........................................................................219 19.3. Information About Work Relationship................................................................................220 19.3.1. Organizational Assignment............................................................................................220 19.3.2. Planned Working Time................................................................................................... 220 19.3.3. Contract Elements......................................................................................................... 220 19.3.4. Internal Medical Service................................................................................................. 221 19.3.5. Monitoring of Dates........................................................................................................ 222 19.3.6. Powers of Attorney......................................................................................................... 222 19.3.7. Date Specifications........................................................................................................ 222 19.3.8. Employment Periods - Public Sector..............................................................................223 19.3.9. Internal Data.................................................................................................................. 223 19.3.10. Statistics...................................................................................................................... 223 19.3.11. German Civil Service Statistics....................................................................................223 19.3.12. Corporate Function...................................................................................................... 223 19.3.13. Company Instructions.................................................................................................. 223 19.3.14. Objects on Loan........................................................................................................... 224 19.3.15. Grievances CA, US...................................................................................................... 224 19.3.16. Residence Status CA, US............................................................................................ 224 19.3.17. External Agencies NL.................................................................................................. 224 19.3.18. CBS NL........................................................................................................................ 224 19.4. Payroll Specifications........................................................................................................ 225 19.4.1. Basic Pay....................................................................................................................... 225 19.4.2. Family-Related Bonuses - PSG.....................................................................................226 19.4.3. External Transfers.......................................................................................................... 227 19.4.4. Tax 227 19.4.5. Social Insurance............................................................................................................ 229 19.4.6. Loans............................................................................................................................. 231 19.4.7. Garnishment.................................................................................................................. 232 19.4.8. Pension.......................................................................................................................... 232 19.4.9. Family Allowance AT..................................................................................................... 232 19.4.10. One Time Pay. Off-Cy. CA, US....................................................................................233 19.4.11. Payroll Outsourcing CA, US......................................................................................... 233 19.4.12. Deduction Limits CA, US.............................................................................................233 19.4.13. Capital Formation (Germany)......................................................................................233 19.4.14. DUEVO (Germany)...................................................................................................... 234 19.4.15. Company Insurance (Germany)...................................................................................235 19.4.16. CF/SPI Data DE Public Sector.....................................................................................235 19.4.17. Official Housing DE Publuc Sector...............................................................................236 19.4.18. Personnel Accommodation DE Public Sector..............................................................237 19.4.19. Non-Monetary Remuneration - PSG............................................................................237 19.4.20. Benefits Payment DE Public Sector.............................................................................237 19.4.21. Sideline Job DE Public Sector.....................................................................................238 19.4.22. Previous Employment Periods DE Public Sector.........................................................238 19.4.23. Rehabilitants DE Public Sector....................................................................................238 19.4.24. Semiretirement DE....................................................................................................... 239 19.4.25. Additional Income ES.................................................................................................. 239 19.4.26. SI Basic Data JP.......................................................................................................... 240 19.4.27. Residence Tax JP........................................................................................................ 240 19.4.28. Life/Casualty Insurance JP..........................................................................................240 19.4.29. Property Accumulation Savings JP..............................................................................241 19.4.30. Union JP...................................................................................................................... 241 19.4.31. Commuting Allowance Info. JP....................................................................................241 19.4.32. Overseas Pay JP......................................................................................................... 241 19.4.33. Social Ins. Funds NL................................................................................................... 242 8 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 19.4.34. Commuting NL............................................................................................................. 242 19.4.35. Premium Reduction NL............................................................................................... 242 19.4.36. Special Regulations NL................................................................................................242 19.4.37. Child care NL............................................................................................................... 243 19.4.38. Unemployment State US.............................................................................................243 19.4.39. W-4 Withholding Info. US............................................................................................. 243 19.4.40. Withholding Overrides US............................................................................................243 19.4.41. IRS Mandates US........................................................................................................ 243 19.4.42. Tip Indicators US......................................................................................................... 244 20. Personnel Development....................................................................................................... 244 20.1. Qualifications / Requirements........................................................................................... 244 21. Compensation Management................................................................................................ 245 21.1. Salary Packages............................................................................................................... 246 21.2. Guidelines......................................................................................................................... 246 21.3. Eligibility Rules.................................................................................................................. 246 21.4. Adjustments...................................................................................................................... 247 21.5. Long-Term Incentives....................................................................................................... 247 22. Benefits................................................................................................................................ 248 22.1. Plans................................................................................................................................. 249 22.1.1. Health plans................................................................................................................... 249 22.1.2. Insurance plans............................................................................................................. 250 22.1.3. Savings plans................................................................................................................ 251 22.1.4. Stock purchase plans..................................................................................................... 252 22.1.5. Spending accounts........................................................................................................ 253 22.1.6. Credit plans.................................................................................................................... 253 22.1.7. Miscellaneous plans....................................................................................................... 254 23. Personnel Time Management..............................................................................................256 23.1. Work Schedules................................................................................................................ 256 23.2. Personnel Time Specifications Administration..................................................................257 23.3. Personnel Time Accounts Administration.........................................................................258 23.4. Personnel Time Recording Subsystem.............................................................................259 24. Training and Event Management.........................................................................................259 24.1. Cost Item.......................................................................................................................... 259 24.2. Business Event Location................................................................................................... 260 24.3. Business Event Group...................................................................................................... 260 24.4. Business Event Type........................................................................................................ 260 24.5. Resource Type.................................................................................................................. 260 24.6. Attendee Types................................................................................................................. 261 24.7. Organizer Types............................................................................................................... 261 25. HR Funds and Position Management..................................................................................261 25.1. Integration with HR Master Data and Organizational Management..................................262 25.2. Additional Integration to Funds Management and to Person............................................262 26. Core Interface - Integration Model.......................................................................................264 26.1. Master Data...................................................................................................................... 264 26.1.1. Supplier.......................................................................................................................... 264 26.1.2. Customer....................................................................................................................... 264 26.1.3. Plant 264 26.1.4. Distribution Center......................................................................................................... 264 26.1.5. Material Master / Product...............................................................................................264 26.1.6. Work Center / Production Resources.............................................................................265 26.1.7. Work Center / Transportation Resources.......................................................................266 26.1.8. Work Center / Handling Resources................................................................................268 26.1.9. Work Center / Storage Resources.................................................................................270 26.1.10. Production Process Model...........................................................................................272 26.2. Misc.................................................................................................................................. 272 26.2.1. Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling..........................................................272 27. APO Master Data................................................................................................................. 274 27.1. Supply Chain Cockpit........................................................................................................ 274 27.1.1. Transportation Lanes..................................................................................................... 274 27.2. Network Design Relevant Master Data/Transactional Data..............................................274 9 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 27.2.1. Demand......................................................................................................................... 274 27.2.2. Location......................................................................................................................... 275 27.2.3. Location Product............................................................................................................ 276 27.2.4. Resources...................................................................................................................... 277 27.2.5. Production Process Models........................................................................................... 277 27.2.6. Transportation Lanes..................................................................................................... 278 27.3. Transportation Planning.................................................................................................... 279 27.3.1. Planning Objects - Key figures.......................................................................................279 27.3.2. Planning Objects - Characteristics.................................................................................279 27.3.3. Info Cubes / Planning Area............................................................................................280 27.3.4. Time buckets................................................................................................................. 281 27.3.5. Planning Book / Data View............................................................................................281 27.3.6. Forecast Profiles............................................................................................................ 283 27.3.7. Transfer Transportation Forecast to Carrier Selection...................................................285 27.4. Supply Network Planning Master Data.............................................................................286 27.4.1. Info Cubes / Planning Area............................................................................................286 27.4.2. Planning Book / Data View............................................................................................287 27.4.3. Demand Profile.............................................................................................................. 287 27.4.4. Supply Profile................................................................................................................. 288 27.4.5. Inventory Policies (Lot size profile)................................................................................289 27.4.6. Transportation Policy (Lot size profile)...........................................................................290 27.4.7. Time Streams................................................................................................................ 290 27.4.8. Time Buckets and Horizon.............................................................................................291 27.5. Vehicle Scheduling and Freight Consolidation..................................................................291 27.5.1. Locations....................................................................................................................... 291 27.5.2. Carrier............................................................................................................................ 293 27.5.3. Transportation Lanes..................................................................................................... 294 27.5.4. Resources...................................................................................................................... 295 27.5.5. Cost Profiles.................................................................................................................. 297 28. Business Planning and Simulation (Master Data SEM-BPS)...............................................297 28.1. Master Data Hierarchy...................................................................................................... 298 28.2. Comments........................................................................................................................ 298 29. Business Consolidation (Master Data SEM-BCS)...............................................................298 29.1. Cons Chart of Accounts/Hierarchy thereof........................................................................298 29.2. Breakdown Categories...................................................................................................... 299 29.3. Custom Characteristics..................................................................................................... 300 29.4. Subitem Categories.......................................................................................................... 300 29.5. Subitems........................................................................................................................... 301 29.6. Sets (Namespace)............................................................................................................ 301 30. Business-to-Business Procurement.....................................................................................301 30.1. Business partner............................................................................................................... 301 30.1.1. External User................................................................................................................. 301 30.1.2. Internal User.................................................................................................................. 303 30.2. Product Master Data......................................................................................................... 304 30.2.1. Product master.............................................................................................................. 304 30.2.2. Material Master Record (Backend)................................................................................304 30.2.3. Service master record (Backend)...................................................................................304 30.3. Account Assignments....................................................................................................... 304 30.3.1. Account Assignment Types (Backend)..........................................................................305 30.3.2. General Ledger (Backend)............................................................................................. 305 30.4. Sources of Supply............................................................................................................. 305 30.4.1. Purchasing Info Record (Backend)................................................................................305 30.4.2. Contract (Backend)........................................................................................................ 306 30.5. Number Ranges................................................................................................................ 306 30.6. Messaging (Backend)....................................................................................................... 306 30.7. Mail System...................................................................................................................... 307 31. Questions............................................................................................................................. 307 32. Cross-Application Master Data............................................................................................ 308 32.1. Business partner............................................................................................................... 308 33. Sales and Distribution.......................................................................................................... 310 10 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 33.1. Product............................................................................................................................. 310 33.2. Product Catalog................................................................................................................ 310 34. Service................................................................................................................................. 311 34.1. Service Interaction Center................................................................................................ 311 34.2. Internet Service................................................................................................................. 311 34.3. Solution Database............................................................................................................. 312

11 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A. Master Data
1. General Master Records
1.1. Material Master
Questions: Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the material data? A: Q: A: Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales units? A: Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantity structures)? A: Q: 5) How do these types differ regarding business processes (stock management, procurement, sales, and so on), data maintained, and persons responsible? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 8) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant? 7) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)? 6) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)? 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

12 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 9) Do you maintain additional types of grouping for other processes (for example, rebate, statistics, commission or pricing)? A: Q: A: Q: 11) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens during sales order processing if a violation occurs? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 14) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the different values? A: Q: 15) According to which criteria, does your material master data let you select with regard to planned QM processes (for example, goods receipt inspection only for raw materials etc)? A: Q: A: Q: 17) Are the technical delivery terms stored online, and will you print these terms with each purchase order? A: Q: 18) Do you require your vendors to provide quality certificates (certificates of conformance or certificates of analysis) either prior to or with material shipments? Describe the types of certificates you require. A: Q: 19) Do you require your vendors to provide samples for approval prior to actual delivery? Please describe. 13 MasterData.doc 16) Do you maintain material-specific technical terms of delivery? 13) Do you record information on competitor products (sales support)? 12) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)? 10) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?

ValueSAP A: Q: 20) Do you block a vendor invoice for payment until the quality inspection has been successfully completed? Explanation: Note: The block can be removed manually if required. A: Q: 21) Will you process recurring inspections for materials? (Note: This is only possible for batch-managed materials). Please provide an example. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 24) Do you value your materials using a standard price, a moving average price, or different valuation methods for different materials? A: Q: 25) Each material must belong to exactly one material group. Which material groups do you need to organize your materials? A: Q: A: 26) Will you need to run MRP ? [ ]Yes [ ]No 27) How many different G/L accounts do you need for inventory? 23) Do you want to maintain a source list for the material types you will procure? 22) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

Q: A: Q: A:

28) Will you maintain specification data for your hazardous substances?

Q: 29) Are separate material master records (perhaps with a separate material type or numbering system) used in the development and engineering/design processes? How and when are they converted to operational material number and type)? 14 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 30) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface? A: Q: 31) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers (internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria). A: Q: 32) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT, HAWA, FMHI, ...? A: Q: 33) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are relevant? How and when are they translated? A: Q: A: Q: 35) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, and so on. A: Q: 36) Describe the change process for materials. 34) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on. A: Q: A: Q: 38) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific field checks)? A: 15 MasterData.doc 37) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

ValueSAP -

Q: 39) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)? A: Q: 40) Do you classify standardized parts by loading DIN classes and characteristic data records? A: Q: 41) Do you have different valuation techniques (for example, standard versus moving average)? If so, please explain which. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 45) PM/CS: Do you need a material master especially for plant maintenance / customer service with reduced information (just basic data and classification data)? A: Q: 46) PM/CS: Do your maintenance or service equipment include major components that you want to deal with individually to compile separate histories? If so, describe these components. A: 44) For a material is there a main delivery location for a sales department? 43) Are your materials taxable? 42) Do you have inventory valued in different currencies at the same facility?

1.2.

Material BOM

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you need to use different BOMs for different applications, such as Production, Engineering, Plant Maintenance, and Costing (BOM usage)? A: 16 MasterData.doc 1) In which context do you use bills of material?

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) Do you use group BOMs for engineering/design and copy or assign them to plants at implementation? A: Q: 4) What change management functions do you require? How do you want to define the validity of BOMs (based on date/freely definable parameters)? Must existing change histories be transferred to the R/3 System? A: Q: 5) Do you use other validity types (such as serial number, time period, or customer) in addition to the "Valid from" date to control the validity of your BOM changes? A: Q: 6) Describe the change process for material BOMs.

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding to release procedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, and so on. A: Q: 7) Do you need a complete history of your BOM changes? For what reasons (documentation, different technical states in operational areas, other)? For what types of BOMs? From what point in time (initial released status, other)? A: Q: 8) Describe the process for creating and adding to material BOMs. Include release procedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering Change Management, and so on. A: Q: 9) Describe the change process for material BOMs. Include release procedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, engineering change management,revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, other. A: Q: 10) Do you want to use one BOM to represent several similar materials (closed variant BOM)? A: Q: 11) Do you have several alternative BOMs for a material, depending on the manufacturing procedure or lot size, for example (multiple BOM)? 17 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 12) Do you have products with a large number of variants? Do you need Variant Configuration? A: Q: 13) Which BOM maintenance functions do you require (copy functions, mass changes, and so on)? A: Q: 14) What structure do your BOMs have? How many levels are there? How many components are there on each level? A: Q: 15) Do your single-level BOMs represent production levels and do you keep your BOM header materials in stock? If not, do you produce non-stock items, or are some assemblies just used as structural elements in a BOM? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 19) Do you have recursive BOMs (the product contains a component with the same material number as the superior assembly)? A: Q: 20) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface? A: Q: 21) Is an integration to external systems such as CAD systems or local PDM systems needed to transfer BOM data to the R/3 System? Please define your requirements for integration (online, batch, controlled redundancy, post-processing in R/3, other). 18 MasterData.doc 18) Do you use sub-items? 17) Which item categories (stock items, non-stock items, documents, texts) do you use? 16) Do you have different BOMs for a material in different plants?

ValueSAP A: Q: 22) If you use alternative items (one component can be replaced by another one), how do you want one of several alternatives to be determined automatically? A: Q: A: Q: 24) If you use alternative BOMs (several BOM structures exist parallel for the same product at the same time), how do you want one of several alternatives to be determined automatically (by production version, lot size, or time)? A: Q: A: Q: 26) Approximately how many finished products and assemblies (header materials with BOMs) do you have? A: Q: 27) Explain for what purposes you use phantom assemblies. 25) Do you produce co-products? 23) Do you require mass changes for BOM maintenance? Please explain.

Explanation: A phantom assembly is a logical (rather than functional) grouping of materials. From a production point of view, these materials are not actually assembled to form a physical unit. A: Q: A: Q: 29) Do you produce co-products during the same process as the main product? (These items are treated as material credit memos for costing and reduce manufacturing costs.) A: Q: A: 30) Lead time offset: Are all your components to be staged at the same time? 28) Do you plan and cost the scrap expected in production? Please explain.

1.3.
MasterData.doc

Service Master
19

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary for you to procure services from external suppliers? If so, do you want to structure and manage these services? What kind of services do you procure? A:

1.4.
1.4.1.

Batch
Batch Master

Questions: Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventory management, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, quality management) do you use batches? A: Q: A: Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic (classification)? A: Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management and maintenance? A: Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material level or customer level? A: Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and not in others? A: Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level) A: Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch number to different materials? (material level or customer level) A: 20 MasterData.doc 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

ValueSAP -

Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually? (internal and external number assignment) A: Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for the material you want to produce in the order? A: Q: A: Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using batch status management? A: Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible for their release? A: Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a crossstorage location or a cross-stock type? A: Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values? A: Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common specification to classes? A: Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in QM) A: Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination? 21 MasterData.doc 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

ValueSAP A: Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches? (batch-find strategy) A: Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions (criteria) you want to use to find batches. A: Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e selection class, A: Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons) A: Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active ingredients that are to be handled with batches? A: Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)? A: Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a percent or can it be defined freely? A: Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure? A: Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination based on ingredient amounts? A:

22 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials or groups of material. A: Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the material, or the remining shelf life. A: Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients; or percent solids? A:

1.4.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Batch Search Strategy

1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material, such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class). A: Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch splits allowed? A: 23 MasterData.doc 6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time? 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales? 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?

ValueSAP -

1.5.

Serial Numbers

Questions: Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to serialize? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management information? A: Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)? A: Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 7) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both? 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A:

24 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

1.6.

Handling unit

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) If you do not receive pallet identification information from your customers, do you execute goods receipt processing based on pallets or material combinations? A: Q: 4) Are the pallets that are shown handled as a homogeneous unit using more than one goods movement? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) During quality checks, do you transport the pallets to other storage locations before the usage decision? A: Q: A: Q: 11) Do you already have packaging requirements for you warehouse personnel? Are the packaging requirements customer-based? 25 MasterData.doc 10) Do you need serial number management in the warehouse? 8) Do you use inspection lot processing on pallet basis? 7) Do you need traceability of materials based on pallet information? 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)? 5) Do you use pallet identification for production supply? 2) Do you require that your customers send you pallet identification information? 1) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 12) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have to ensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order? A: Q: 13) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in the availability check? A:

1.7.

Work Center

Questions: Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)? A: Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into routings? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation? 26 MasterData.doc 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals? 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources? 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used? 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

ValueSAP A: Q: 9) Are certain types of maintenance work always carried out by external contractors? If so, please list and describe these types of maintenance work. A: Q: 10) PM/CS: In case of time-reported jobs, is contractors' work measured prior to payment being made? A: Q: A: Q: 12) Are you going to be scheduling labor resources within your networks? (If yes, use workcenters.) A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you tend to plan labor resources at a department or individual level? (For both, consider the work center capacity and HR assignment configuration requirements). A: Q: 15) It is possible to have a work center that includes both people and machines. Do you have multiple uses for your work centers? A: Q: 16) The work center controls the formula for controlling scheduling. Do you have special work center scheduling requirements? A: Q: 17) Work centers provide the basis for capacity planning. Do you want to manage capacities for your projects? A: Q: 18) Will you be using PP and PS functionality? (If yes, carefully consider the integration and processes between the PP and PS work centers for capacity planning.) A: 27 MasterData.doc 13) Will you be doing cost planning on networks? (If yes, you will need work centers.) 11) PM/CS: Are the external resources planned?

ValueSAP -

1.8.

Customer Master Record

Questions: Q: 1) Which types of business partner do you have? For example, sole proprietor, legal person, employees, foreign, other? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Describe your partner functions in detail. 4) If more than one department, describe the responsibilities of each? 3) Which department(s) are responsible for the maintenance of customer data? 2) How many active customers do you intend to transfer to your R/3 System?

Explanation: SAP partner functions are used to determine all possible functions that a business partner can take on (for example, the ordering party - sold-to party, the recipient of goods - ship-to party, and the party that has to pay - payer). A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Do your customers have multiple ship-tos and payers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you maintain sales prospects? [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Do you have one-time customers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 10) Do you have vendors who are also customers? 28 MasterData.doc 6) Which partner functions are used for the different sales documents?

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q:

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Describe the structure of your current customer numbering scheme.

Q: A: Q: A:

12) Do you assign customers to industry sectors?

Q: 13) Do you want to record any specific marketing information (for example, Nielsen IDs, customer classification)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 16) Does your customer allow you to combine different sales orders into one delivery? [ ]Yes [ ]No 17) Does your customer allow partial deliveries? 15) Will you record contact-person information on your customers? 14) Do you group customers according to any of the following criteria?

Q: A: Q: A:

18) If you have multiple plants, is your customer normally supplied by a specific plant? [ ]Yes [ ]No 19) Define your customer delivery priority levels and explain the assignment process.

Q: A: Q: A:

20) Are there special shipping conditions for your customer?

Q: 21) Do you record foreign trade customers who are placed on an export control list to possibly deny deliveries to them? 29 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 22) Do you use customer-specific calendars and/or goods receiving hours?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

23) What are your terms of payment for your customers?

24) Are there any discounts linked to terms of payment, such as cash discounts?

Q: 25) Do you have sales documents in foreign currencies? Describe how the exchange rate is calculated. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 32) Do you use the same structure of customer master records in all departments? [ ]Yes [ ]No 31) Describe any other information relevant to customers. 30) Which texts are used for the different sales documents (for sales, shipping, billing)? 29) What texts do you maintain at a customer level? 28) What Incoterms will your customers use (for example, FOB, free domicile)? 27) Are reminders sent? How long is the waiting period? 26) What kind of payments do you get from your customer?

30 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 33) Do you ever need to block a customer for sales processing? If so, describe the process in detail. A: Q: A: Q: A: 35) Do you maintain customer data in an external system? [ ]Yes [ ]No 34) How will you determine/select a customer for processing (matchcode)?

1.9.

Vendor Master Record

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you want vendor numbers assigned in the R/3 System? Name your criteria for manual and automatic number assignment. Describe the format of manually assigned vendor numbers. Explanation: Ways of assigning numbers: 1. Automatically by the R/3 System 2. Manually be the user 3. Automatically and manually A: Q: 4) Do you have plants that supply materials or services to other plants in other company codes? A: Q: 5) Do stock transport orders take place between stores or between the DC and store? If so, for which sites? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Is it necessary for you to maintain different purchasing vendor master data for different plants? 31 MasterData.doc 6) Do you want to reflect the organizational structure of your vendors in the R/3 System? 2) How many active vendors do you want to transfer to R/3? 1) What types of vendors do you have? (domestic, foreign, payment address, etc.)

ValueSAP A: Q: 8) When working with your suppliers, do you deal with people with different roles? If yes, indicate the appropriate roles. A: Q: A: Q: 10) Are there any vendor-specific instructions or information that you want to include in purchasing documents? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Do you employ different payment terms by facility?

Q: 11) Do your vendors offer discounts for prompt payment (for example, 1% cash discount within 10 days)? Provide a list of the payment terms you require. A: Q: 12) Do you specify foreign-trade-specific information in your purchasing documents (such as CIF or FOB)? hose needed. A: Q: 13) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers, and so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)? A: Q: 14) Do you need to maintain default data for the article master (such as planned delivery time, purchasing group) at vendor level? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 15) Brazil only: Do you need a CGC/CPF check for vendors? If so, how do you want the system to act (information message, warning, error message)? A: Q: A: Q: 17) Do you have vendors who are subject to withholding tax? 16) How many vendors regularly supply you with goods?

32 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Possibile to group with different account groups; Maintenance of fields in master record. in master record. A:

1.10.

Bank/Bank Directory TR/FI

Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to create the bank directory (address and control data for banks and post office banks) manually or copy it automatically? A: Q: 2) Which banks and bank accounts will you be using for incoming and outgoing payments? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Are certain payments handled by more than one bank (correspondent banks/intermediary banks)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) In what currencies are these accounts denominated?

1.11.

Taxes

Questions: Q: 1) Will you use an external Tax Package to determine the appropriate tax jurisdiction and/or tax rates to apply to purchasing documents and/or vendor invoices? If yes, name the external package. A: Q: A: 2) Will the tax jurisdiction codes be loaded into SAP?

2. Product Data Management

2.1. Change master
Questions: Q: 1) Do you use engineering change requests (ECRs) and engineering change orders (ECOs) to change master data objects? 33 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which objects (such as material master records, BOMs, task lists, and documents) do you want to change using engineering change management? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you use other effectivity types than "valid-from" date validity (such as time period or serial number) to implement changes? Do you need additional effectivity types? A: Q: 7) If using multiple effectivity types, for which level of the product structure (finished product, assembly, or produced part) do you use which effectivity type for changes? A: Q: 8) Do you use date shifts of change master records or ECRs/ECOs when working with "valid-from" date validity? A: Q: 9) Do you use alternative dates to make the "valid-from" date of certain objects differ from the change header date? A: Q: 10) Do you use profiles to make it easier to create change master records or ECRs/ECOs? A: Q: 11) Do you use the release key to release changes specifically for certain business processes (BOM explosion simulation, Costing, MRP, Production, and so on)? A: 5) Do you mainly use "valid-from" date validity to control the validity of changes? 4) How do you want change numbers assigned? 2) Do you want to extend the standard features of Engineering Change Management?

34 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 12) Which release keys are to lead to a preselection of the change for Order Change Management (user-friendly comparison and synchronization of production orders with a BOM change)? A: Q: 13) What settings do you use for the different object types? Do you want object management records to be created manually or generated automatically? A: Q: A: Q: 15) What change status (change number status, poss. user status) do you require for management of the process? A: 14) Describe the process for executing a change without using an ECR/ECO.

2.2.

ECR/ECO

Questions: Q: 1) Do you use engineering change requests (ECRs) and engineering change orders (ECOs) to change master data objects? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you use a workflow for requesting, approving, and executing a change? Please describe the process. A: Q: 4) How does the workflow (if used) differ between different change types? Are there different workflow steps or responsibilities, for example? A: Q: 5) What change status (change number status, system status, or user status) do you require for management of the process? A: 2) Which change types are needed to distinguish different categories of change?

2.3.
MasterData.doc

Leading change master record

35

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you need change hierarchies?

2.4.

Object management record

Questions: Q: 1) Which change types are needed for object management records (especially important when using workflow)? A:

2.5.

Revision level

Questions: Q: 1) Do you use revision levels to distinguish between different states of an object? For which object types? What is the sequence of revision levels assigned? A:

2.6.

Single Dependency

Questions: Q: 1) Do you maintain dependencies (between objects), possible use of dependencies and dependency types? A: Q: 2) Do you also use object dependencies outside the variant configuration (for example to avoid errors by classification rules of objects)? A: Q: 3) Do you plan to use engineering change management to change object dependencies? A: Q: A: Q: A: 5) What category type do you want to use? 4) What possible usage, status, and categories will you use?

36 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

2.7.

Configuration profile

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you configure objects and object types and determine how the results of BOM explosion are to be stored? A: 4) Where do you use variant configuration (BOM's, routings, projects, other areas)? 3) Determine the configuration profile to be used. 2) Define the necessary control parameters. 1) Define allocation and object dependencies.

3. Production Planning and Procurement Planning

3.1.
3.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Do you have products to be grouped into product groups for planning (for example, due to similar procurement methods or because they are manufactured on the same bottleneck machine)? A:

Sales and Operations Planning

Product Group

3.1.2.
Questions:

Rough-cut Planning Profile

Q: 1) In medium to long-term planning do you use a rough-cut planning profile for resource leveling? A:

3.1.3.
Questions:

Information Structure

37 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 1) Define your most important information structures

3.1.4.
Questions: Q: A:

Planning hierarchy

1) Define your most important planning hierarchies

3.1.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Planning Type

1) Do you require self-defined planning table views?

3.1.6.
Questions:

Planning Event

Q: 1) Do you want to define events in Sales and Operations Planning (SOP), so that their influence on your planning is not derived from historical data? A:

3.2.
3.2.1.

MRP/MPS/Long-Term Planning
BOM Explosion Number

Questions: Q: 1) Must you enter a specific BOM explosion, which is valid up to a set date, for a material, in the case of a multiple BOMs for example? A:

3.2.2.
Questions:

Planning Calendar

Q: 1) Do you want to define flexible period lengths for Production Planning and Material Requirements Planning (for lot size determination and evaluation purposes for example)? A:

3.2.3.
Questions:

Quota Arrangement

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently maintaining? 38 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

3.2.4.
Questions:

Production Lot

Q: 1) Do you have various manufacturing processes for an assembly and do you want to calculate the costs of the various manufacturing processes separately and compare them with each other? A:

4. Procurement
Questions: Q: A: 1) How many different materials do you procure on a regular basis?

4.1.

Manufacturer Part Number

Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain your vendor's part number within SAP, associated to your material master number? If yes, could there be more than one manufacturers part number associated with one of your material master numbers? A:

4.2.

Conditions

Questions: Q: 1) Which price components do you use in purchasing documents (e.g. gross price, surcharges, discounts, freight, duty, import)? A: Q: 2) Do prices depend on the quantity ordered (e.g. quantity discounts or price scales)? If so, specify price components, quantity, and other factors. A: Q: 3) To which date does the price determination process relate? (E.g. delivery date, PO date, other.) A:

39 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) Is pricing information from other systems to be used for price computation purposes in R/3? A: Q: 5) Do you manually change the price at header level for the entire purchasing document? A: Q: 6) Do you allow changes to the gross price that is automatically determined by the R/3 System? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 9) Specifically for Brazil indexation: Which indexes and forms are necessary? 8) Is it possible to change pricing conditions after a PO has been created? 7) Does the vendor's price include value-added tax?

4.3.

Source List

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to maintain a list of approved vendors? This means that if a material is subject to a source list requirement, it can only be procured from the vendors included on the source list. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) Will you maintain specific vendor hierarchies?

Q: 3) Do you need a source list for: (1) all materials (2) all materials of a plant (3) certain materials only? Please explain. A: Q: 4) Is there a fixed vendor for some materials? (1) No. (1) Yes, in certain plants (specify) (2) Yes, across the entire enterprise (3) Yes, everywhere except in certain plants (specify). A: 40 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 5) Do some vendors cover certain geogr. regions? (1) No. (2) Yes. Warning if vendor does not cover relevant region. (3) Yes. Prevent issue of POs in latter case. o Explanation: Are some of your suppliers specific to a geographic region? Are some of your suppliers specific to a geographic region? Example : ACME Widgets supplies plants in the western region; ABC Widgets supplies plants in the eastern region. A western plant should not order widgets from an eastern region supplier. not order widgets from an eastern region supplier. (1) Do not need this feature. (2) Want this feature, warning only if vendor does not cover the plant's region. (3) Want this feature, preventing orders from vendors that do not cover a plant's region. a plant's region. If you want to use this feature, indicate the region to which each of your plants belong. A: Q: 6) Should it be possible to for purchase orders to be created automatically in the course of material requirements planning (MRP)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Should it be possible to for scheduling agreement schedule lines to be created automatically in the course of material requirements planning (MRP)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

4.4.

Quota Arrangement

Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently maintaining? A:

4.5.

Delivery Address

Questions: Q: 1) Are there addresses, over and above the plant address(es) that will be used repeatedly on purchasing documents? If yes, provide a list of those needed. A: Q: 2) Do any storage locations have an address that varies from the assigned plant? If yes, provide a list of the additional specific storage location addresses. A:

41 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

4.6.

Vendor Rebate Arrangements

Questions: Q: 1) Do you wish to send your business partners written confirmation of rebate arrangements entered into with them? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you grant your vendors volume rebates based on the volume of business done over a period of time? A:

4.7.

Settlement Accounting for Conditions Requiring Subsequent Settlement

Questions: Q: 1) Is the data from the process of subsequent settlement to be included in the profitability analysis? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Is the process of subsequent settlement to be carried out at plant level?

Q: A: Q: A:

3) At which levels is aggregation or sorting of data to be carried out?

Q: 4) Must external business volume data (e.g. from sites with other systems) be taken into account for subsequent (end-of-period rebate) settlement? A: Q: 5) Are tolerance limits to be taken into account in subsequent (end-of-period rebate) settlement? If so, which? A: Q: 6) Are your business partners to be given written notification of rebate arrangements for which settlement accounting has taken place? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) How long do your agreements run? 42 MasterData.doc

Q:

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Listing of the various intervals used Listing of the various intervals used A: Q: 8) What is the maximum period of an agreement with the settlement partner?

Explanation: For example, until cancelled or redefined annually. Note: You cannot map the option "until cancellation" in the R/3 System by choosing "unending" rebate arrangement (until 12.31.9999). See: Extending Rebate Arrangements Arrangements A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 11) Do you extend your agreements at regular intervals? [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) If so, how often do you extend them? 10) Which periods of time do you use that have a validity period of less than one year? 9) How many agreements do you use that have a validity period of more than one year?

Q: A: Q:

13) Do you use rebate arrangements that apply retrospectively?

Explanation: This can always only be done in exceptional cases! A: Q: A: 14) Do you carry out several settlements for each agreement? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 15) In the case of multiple settlement, do you use fixed time intervals that can be defined beforehand in a calendar? Explanation: In the case of fixed predefined time intervals, partial settlement is possible otherwise only interim settlement. Urgent recommendation: work with partial settlement only. Reason: interim settlement is not a data retention level. It is not subsequently possible to determine which document items were settled in which settlement run. 43 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 16) At which time intervals will you carry out partial settlement with regard to a rebate agreement? Explanation: Maintenance of arrangement calendar. A: Q: 17) If you perform several settlements for each rebate arrangement: Do you perform a final settlement in which all previous payments on account are taken into consideration? Explanation: The sum of the partial settlement payments may exceed the rebate achieved at the end of the rebate arrangement validity period. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 18) Do you settle up with regard to rebate arrangements only within a self-contained accounting unit ("company code"), or are different volume rebates also settled for different sub-enterprises in a single rebate arrangement and allocated proportionately? Explanation: At this point, you should not underestimate the volume of documents. A: Q: A: Q: 20) Are settlements that are sent to customers (instead of vendors) also created based on the business volume data from purchasing or agency business? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 19) Do you settle rebate arrangements as credits or debits?

Q: 21) Before which settlements do you agree on your business volume with your settlement partners? Explanation: For example, only before final settlement for a rebate arrangement or also before the settlements before that, for example, mid-year settlements A: Q: 22) Do you want to post the settlement documents immediately in Financial Accounting?

44 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: You can set a posting block so that settlements must be released in a separate step. separate step. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 23) Do you receive promotional deals?

Q:

Explanation: Rebate based on business volume that is paid out at fixed intervals for defined periods, for example. for example. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 24) Are subsequent settlement conditions to be taken into account for articles subject to inventory management (valuation) on a value basis? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 25) When is the business volume updated?

Q: A: Q: A:

26) Which business-volume-relevant document types do you use?

Q: 27) Which schema do you want to use to calculate conditions that are subsequently settled? Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent settlement, if necessary? A: Q: 28) Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent settlement, if necessary? A: Q: 29) On which value does the business volume of subsequent settlement depend?

Explanation: Net value in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on Net value in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on A: Q: 30) Are conditions calculated differently?

Explanation: Gross/net, different access sequence, and so on Gross/net, different access sequence, and so on 45 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 31) Do you want to transfer business volume data from other systems to the R/3 System? Explanation: Several tools are available for transferring legacy data: - Per File - Per proforma vendor billing document A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 32) Do you want to import documents subject to volume-based rebates into the system using a data carrier? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 33) Which evaluations and statistics do you need?

Q:

Explanation: For example, business volume and revenue at material group or article type level type level A:

4.8.

Release Strategy with Classification

Questions: Q: 1) Will any purchasing documents be subject to approval in SAP? If yes, describe the criteria that will be needed to determine the appropriate approval policy for purchase requisitions, RFQs, purchase orders, contracts, scheduling agreements. A:

4.9.

Vendor Evaluation

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you rate the scores for these criteria? If the criteria are not weighted equally, indicate the individual weightings. A: 46 MasterData.doc 2) Which criteria do you use to evaluate your vendors? 1) How do you evaluate vendors in your legacy system?

ValueSAP -

5. Production
5.1.
5.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs or with which task lists/master recipes A:

Discrete Production
Production Version

5.1.2.
5.1.2.1. Questions:

Work Center
Work Center

Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)? A: Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into routings? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 8) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation? 47 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals? 6) Will you require capacity planning for your work centers/resources? 5) Do you use a human resources management system? In what way is it used? 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?

ValueSAP -

A: 5.1.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process unit)? A: Q: A: 5.1.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes, define your shifts and intervals. A: Shift Sequence 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)? Capacity

5.1.3.
5.1.3.1. Questions: Q: A:

Routing
Routings

1) For which business processes do you require routings?

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all operations? Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house production time of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-house production time from the material master. A: Q: A: 48 MasterData.doc 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations? 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

ValueSAP -

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your vendor will process? A: Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing purposes? A: Q: A: Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system? A: Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions, mass changes etc.)? A: Q: A: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.1.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as templates (reference operation sets)? A: 49 MasterData.doc Reference Operation Set 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)? 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings? 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

ValueSAP 5.1.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of your materials? A: Q: A: Q: A: 5.1.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) Will you require trigger points ( such as all subsequent processes to be released up to final point , all immediate process to be released etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 5) Will you create trigger point groups with standard triggers? 4) Will you use trigger points to generate rework orders/ standard operations ? 3) What system status do you want to you use? 2) What functions will you want trigger points to perform? Standard Trigger Point 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools? 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require? Production Resources and Tools

5.1.4.
5.1.4.1. Questions: Q: A:

CAPP Standard Values Calculation

CAPP Formula

1) Will you want to calculate your standard values with given formulas and methods?

50 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

5.2.
5.2.1.

Repetitive Manufacturing
Production Version

Questions: Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs or with which task lists/master recipes A:

5.2.2.
Questions:

Product Cost Collectors

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost collector for each production method or for each material? A:

5.2.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Planning ID

1) Do you want to use the planning ID to group materials for planning and evaluation?

5.2.4.
5.2.4.1. Questions: Q: A:

Line Design
Rate Routing

1) For which business processes do you require routings?

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all operations? Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house production time of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-house production time from the material master. A: 51 MasterData.doc 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations?

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your vendor will process? A: Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing purposes? A: Q: A: Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system? A: Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions, mass changes etc.)? A: Q: A: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.2.4.2. Questions: Reference Rate Routing 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)? 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings? 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

52 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as templates (reference operation sets)? A: 5.2.4.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to represent the structure of a production line (line segment, processing stations and so on) in a hierarchy? A: 1) Do you use line balancing, tact-based scheduling or sequencing? Line Hierarchy

5.3.
5.3.1.

Process Manufacturing
Production Version

Questions: Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs or with which task lists/master recipes A:

5.3.2.
5.3.2.1. Questions:

Resource
Resource

Q: 1) Will you use different resource categories and what will be the differences between them (for example, labor resources, storage resources, processing units)? A: Q: 2) Will you produce, for example, in a tank, and will you then store the finished product in this tank until delivery (storage resources)? A: Q: 3) What functions shall be fulfilled by your resources? How will you use resources (scheduling, capacity, costs, etc.)? A: Q: 4) Do you have resources that you will allocate to the process order on short notice (classification, resource selection)? A:

53 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) With which other objects will resources be linked (cost center, qualification, etc.)? Will there be a link to the Human Resources Management system? A: Q: 6) Which standard values will you use (for example, labor time, machine time, setup time)? A: Q: 7) Will special formulas be required for certain resources for scheduling, capacity requirements planning, and cost determination? A: Q: A: Q: 9) Will each resource have a standard available capacity or do you want shift intervals to be maintained? A: Q: A: Q: 11) Will there be restrictions regarding material flow through processing units that can be visually reproduced using a sequence definition or a network? A: 5.3.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process unit)? A: Q: A: 5.3.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes, define your shifts and intervals. 54 MasterData.doc Shift Sequence 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)? Capacity 10) Do you need resource hierarchies for capacity evaluation purposes? 8) Do you want default values to be defined in the resource for the master recipe?

ValueSAP A:

5.3.3.
5.3.3.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Master Recipe
Master Recipe

1) How many different master recipes will you need?

2) What will you use recipes for?

Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into account? A: Q: A: Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing, quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logical distribution according to user department or using material flow? A: Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do you want the validity of the recipe to be defined? A: Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be required (change request/order)? A: Q: A: 55 MasterData.doc 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe? 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need? 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements?

12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation?

13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations?

Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time, machine time, setup time)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing purposes? A: Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation (secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor, transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation A: Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production resources/tools)? A: Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being delivered to storage? 56 MasterData.doc 17) Which process instructions will you need? 16) Will you use milestone confirmations? 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

ValueSAP A: Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics to phases)? A: Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process message)? A: Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes (copy function, mass changes, etc.)? A: 5.3.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of your materials? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or also based on localization, value, responsible person etc.? A: Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibrated regularly? A: Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or defects and transfer to the R/3 System. A: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools? 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require? Production Resources and Tools

57 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

5.4.
5.4.1.

KANBAN
Supply Area

Questions: Q: 1) Define supply areas, which serve as temporary warehouses in Production, in order to directly stage material for production in the work center. A:

5.4.2.
Questions:

Control Cycle

Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and supply source. Define your control cycles! A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings, regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material quantity per kanban)? A: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer? 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement? 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production? 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

6. Sales and Distribution

6.1.
6.1.1.
Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

Business Partner
Customer hierarchy

58 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases by customer group? A: Q: A: Q: 4) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures within your customers' enterprises? A: 3) List reports and give examples.

6.2.
6.2.1.

Products
Material determination

Questions: Q: 1) If you use special packaging for different occasions, such as, Thanksgiving), do you want the system to automatically substitute the special packaging when the product is ordered? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) If yes, how does substitution take place, that is on which master data fields do you base your substitution? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want product substitution to occur only when the original ordered product is not available? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Why would you substitute one product for another or one packaging for another?

Q: 5) Do you want the substituted product to be listed as a sub-item of the originally ordered product, or should the substituted product completely replace the original product? A: Q: 6) Do you want to print product information for the original or the substitute product in the output? A: 59 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 7) Do you want product substitution to occur automatically, or should data entry personnel be offered a selection screen containing substitutable products? A:

6.2.2.
Questions:

Item proposal

Q: 1) Do you use a process to simplify order entry for customers that regularly order the same product or group of products? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes, please describe this process in detail.

Q: A:

6.2.3.
Questions:

Dynamic product proposal

Q: 1) Do you need automatic product proposal specific to your customer during sales order processing? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 4) Do you want to create dynamic product proposals online or in the background? 3) Do you need to display a monthly, weekly, or daily sales order history? 2) Which information sources do you need to determine product proposals dynamically?

6.2.4.
Questions:

Cross Selling

Q: 1) During your telesales activities, do you want to inform customers about additional products to the one they are ordering (for example, accessories)? A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 3) Do you create cross-selling lists online or in the background? 60 2) What is your cross-selling policy based on?

ValueSAP -

A:

6.2.5.
Questions:

Material Listing /Material Exclusion

Q: 1) Do you offer specific materials to certain customers (material listing)? If yes, describe this process in detail. Explanation: Do you apply certain items/materials to selected customers (material listing)? If yes, describe this process in detail. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you exclude customers from ordering certain products (material exclusion)? If yes, describe the process in detail. A: Q: A: 4) What are your selection criteria for material exclusion? 2) What are your selection criteria for material listing?

6.2.6.
Questions:

Value Contract Assortment module

Q: 1) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standard material, product hierarchy, assortment)? A:

6.2.7.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Product allocation

1) Do you limit the quantity of an item that you sell to a customer (product allocation)?

2) How do you allocate (by customer, geographic area, material)?

6.3.
6.3.1.

Assortment
Assortment Module Maintenance

Questions: 61 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) Do you refine the results from listing by using assortment levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No

6.3.2.
Questions:

Product proposal processing

Q: 1) Is your material master data to be structured to administer price catalogs for customers? A:

6.3.3.
Questions: Q:

Assortment-Assortment User Assignment Maintenance

1) Are you a wholesaler?

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a wholesaler. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do you have particular customer assortments for your wholesale customers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Can customers only order materials listed in their particular assortment?

Q: A:

Q:

Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a wholesaler. are a wholesaler. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

6.4.
6.4.1.

Agreements
Customer material information

Questions: Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-material combination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customer and material? 62 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: A:

6.4.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Rebate Agreement

1) Describe your how you process rebates.

2) What are your rebates based on (for example, customer, material)?

3) Do you manage accruals for rebates?

4) What type of rebates do you offer (for example, volume, quantity, lump sum)?

5) Do you define validity periods for rebates?

6.4.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc

Marketing campaigns

1) Do you group marketing deals into marketing plans? If yes, please describe in detail.

2) Do you offer marketing deals on your products to customer (one-time discounts)?

3) Are these deals customer specific or are they related to the product? 63

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you assign a budget maintained by CO profitability analysis for promotion on sales? A: Q: A: 6) Do you monitor the budget process? 4) Are special payment terms given with sales deals?

6.4.4.
Questions: Q: A:

Price Catalog

1) Do you manage price catalogs?

6.5.

Conditions

Questions: Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with discounts, surcharges)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document and which apply to the item level only? A: 64 MasterData.doc 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or internal) in order to calculate a price? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices. A: Q: A: 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)? 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)? 13) What date is the pricing based on? 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types? 10) Do you document your price units? 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

65 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or the expected order value? A: Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified amount or on a percentage of the price per piece? A: Q: A: Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and deactivate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative values)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes?

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or "lowest" price? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

Q: A:

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and music system help determine the price to be charged. A: Q: A: 24) Do you use an external tax package? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order production? A: Q: A: 66 MasterData.doc 26) Describe all other combinations.

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing?

Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed values)? A: Q: A: Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so on)? A: Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures within your customers' enterprises? A: Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of the material? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?

6.6.

Output

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Collect print out (samples) of the required documents/messages (e.g. order confirmation, pick list, packing list, invoice). A: 67 MasterData.doc 3) When is output sent? 2) What type of output do you send (e.g. Paper, Fax, EDI, Internet)? 1) What master data fields do you use to determine what output to send?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

5) How are sales activity documents to be transmitted?

6) How are sales documents to be transmitted?

7) How are deliveries to be transmitted?

8) How are shipping documents to be transmitted?

9) How should shipment documents be transmitted?

10) How are billing documents to be transmitted?

11) How should foreign trade documents be transmitted?

6.7.
6.7.1.

Transport
Routes/Stages

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you use the transportation functionality? 1) Do you need routes as selection criteria for deliveries?

6.7.2.
Questions:

Route schedule

Q: 1) Do you plan weekly customer deliveries from a shipping point to different goods recipients and their unloading points in a route (route schedule)? A:

6.7.3.
Questions:

Transportation connection point

68 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you use stages/transportation connection points in order to refine your transportation handling (freight costs, time scheduling, output, etc.)? A:

7. Inventory Management, Warehouse Management and Transportation

7.1. Hazardous Material

Questions: Q: A: 1) Are your hazardous materials administered at just one or several storage locations?

7.2.

Batch

Questions: Q: 1) General: Do you manage your materials in batches? In what areas (inventory management, production, sales and distribution, warehouse management, quality management) do you use batches? A: Q: A: Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic (classification)? A: Q: 4) General: Which organizational area is responsible for batch management and maintenance? A: Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material level or customer level? A: Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and not in others? A: 69 MasterData.doc 2) General: How many batches do you have in a particular period of time?

ValueSAP -

Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level) A: Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch number to different materials? (material level or customer level) A: Q: 9) Batch number: Do want the batch number to be assigned automatically or manually? (internal and external number assignment) A: Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for the material you want to produce in the order? A: Q: A: Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using batch status management? A: Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible for their release? A: Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a crossstorage location or a cross-stock type? A: Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values? A: Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common specification to classes? A: 70 MasterData.doc 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?

ValueSAP -

Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in QM) A: Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination? A: Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches? (batch-find strategy) A: Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions (criteria) you want to use to find batches. A: Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e selection class, A: Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons) A: Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active ingredients that are to be handled with batches? A: Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)? A: Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a percent or can it be defined freely? A:

71 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure? A: Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination based on ingredient amounts? A: Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials or groups of material. A: Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the material, or the remining shelf life. A: Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients; or percent solids? A:

7.3.

Batch Search Strategy

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material, such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class). A: Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 72 MasterData.doc 5) Do you need automatic or manual batch determination in Sales? 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)? 1) Do you use batch materials in Sales and Distribution?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

6) Do you determine batches at order time or at delivery time?

Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch splits allowed? A:

7.4.

Control Cycle

Questions: Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and supply source. Define your control cycles! A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings, regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material quantity per kanban)? A: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer? 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement? 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production? 2) Which replenishment strategies will you use?

7.5.

Serial Numbers

Questions: Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to serialize? A: Q: A: 73 MasterData.doc 2) Do you assign serial numbers to materials?

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management information? A: Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)? A: Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 7) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A:

8. Customer Service
8.1.
8.1.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In your current organizational structure, do you need to analyze purchases by customer group? 74 MasterData.doc 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?

Business Partner
Customer Hierarchy

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 3) List reports and give examples.

8.2.
8.2.1.

Rebate Arrangements
Customer Material Information

Questions: Q: 1) Do you allow shipping data to be maintained for a specific customer-material combination (for example, plant, delivery priority, minimum delivery quantity)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have under or overdelivery tolerances for certain combinations of customer and material? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do your customers place orders using their own material numbers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Do you define material descriptions for specific customers? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: A:

8.2.2.
Questions:

Conditions

Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with discounts, surcharges)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: 75 MasterData.doc 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?

ValueSAP -

Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document and which apply to the item level only? A: Q: A: 6) Are manual changes to price conditions allowed in your enterprise? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is the calculation carried out? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or internal) in order to calculate a price? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 76 MasterData.doc 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)? 13) What date is the pricing based on? 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types? 10) Do you document your price units? 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?

ValueSAP -

Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices. A: Q: A: Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or the expected order value? A: Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified amount or on a percentage of the price per piece? A: Q: A: Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and deactivate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative values)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 19) Do you use "interval scales" for price determination purposes? 16) Do you wish to pass on pricing information to CO-PA (Profitability Analysis)?

Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or "lowest" price? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 22) Do your prices include sales tax?

Q: A:

Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and music system help determine the price to be charged. A: Q: A: MasterData.doc 24) Do you use an external tax package? [ ]Yes 77

ValueSAP [ ]No Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order production? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed values)? A: Q: A: Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so on)? A: Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures within your customers' enterprises? A: Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of the material? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes? 27) On which master data combinations do you base your pricing? 26) Describe all other combinations.

8.3.
8.3.1.

Products
Material Master: Service Product

Questions: Q: 1) Which departments/organizational units are responsible for maintaining the material data? A: 78 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales units? A: Q: 4) Which types of materials do you distinguish between (examples, accruals, quantity structures)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens during sales order processing if a violation occurs? A: Q: A: Q: 11) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the different values? A: Q: 12) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface? A: 10) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)? 8) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)? 7) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant? 6) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)? 5) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)? 2) Is master data common across all departments (common master data)?

79 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 13) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers (internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria). A: Q: 14) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT, HAWA, FMHI, ...? A: Q: 15) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are relevant? How and when are they translated? A: Q: A: Q: 17) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, and so on. A: Q: 18) Describe the change process for materials. 16) What types of texts do you maintain for your materials?

Explanation: Please note your requirements regarding release procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering Change Management, revision levels, and so on. A: Q: A: Q: 20) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific field checks)? A: Q: 21) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)? A: 19) Which cross-plant and plant-specific material statuses are necessary?

8.4.
MasterData.doc

Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)

80

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) How should the technical systems of your customers be structured?

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces of equipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure of the technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, see the relevant technical objects. A: Q: A: Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)? A: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle in your service?

8.4.1.
Questions:

Functional Location

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly? A: Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using functional locations? A: Q: 3) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost center levels, production process levels)? A: Q: 4) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional or technical viewpoints? A: Q: 5) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)? A: Q: A: 81 MasterData.doc 6) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

7) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?

Q: 8) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)? A: Q: 9) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 11) Do you need to link documents to functional locations? [ ]Yes [ ]No 10) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?

Q: 12) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points and counters? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Q: A:

Q:

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 15) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: 82 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

16) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 17) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment? Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage site. If yes, you should work with functional locations. A: Q: 18) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for functional locations? A: Q: 19) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional location? Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: 20) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A: Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A:

8.4.2.
Questions:

Equipment

Q: 1) Do you have technical serviceable items (for example, PCs) as a reference in Customer Service (for example, in orders)? If yes, give an example. A: 83 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 2) Do you identify these for information only in unchecked system numbers and/or using master records, such as serial number records or equipment master records? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number (by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)? A: Q: 7) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the manufacturer as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 8) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 9) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them. A: Q: 10) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods movements)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system? 4) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain. 3) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

Q: 11) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A:

84 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 12) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment. Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment master records? If yes, give some examples. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

Q: 15) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A: Q: 16) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 17) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment. A: Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 19) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting work on specific equipment? A: Q: 20) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example. 85 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 21) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 22) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history A: Q: 23) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A: Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A:

8.4.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Fleet Object

1) Which serviceable objects need to be entered as equipment master data?

2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

3) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number (by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)? A: 86 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the manufacturer as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them. A: Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods movements)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A: Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment. Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment master records? If yes, give some examples. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A: Q: MasterData.doc 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both? 87

ValueSAP -

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment. A: Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting work on specific equipment? A: Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example. A: Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history A: Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A: 88 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A: Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types. A: Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for userdefined master data (business add-in). A: Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. A: Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. A: Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. A: Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

89 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories (for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units (for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on) A: Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption counter, time counter and so on)? A: Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects A: Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption -> inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last? A:

8.4.4.
Questions: Q: A:

Bill of Material for Functional Location

1) Will you use functional location BOMs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) How are they structured?

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes? [ ]Yes [ ]No

8.4.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Equipment Bill of Material

1) Do you have structures for special sub-items? [ ]Yes [ ]No

90 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are structured. A: Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A: Q: A: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) If so, are they stored electronically? [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

Q: A:

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials? [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Do you use variant configuration? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: A:

8.4.6.
Questions:

Installed Base

91 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for bills of material? Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and timebased. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables. object using the corresponding Customizing tables. A: Q: A: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

8.4.7.
Questions:

Reference Functional Location

Q: 1) Do you have many similar objects to reproduce the technical structures of your customers site? A: Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented as reference functional locations? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional location hierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)? A:

8.5.

Task Lists

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements. A: 92 MasterData.doc 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

ValueSAP 8.5.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how? 1) Do you require configurable task lists?

General Task List

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter A:

8.6.

Maintenance Plans and Service Agreements

Questions: Q: 1) Will you offer a preventive maintenance service to your customers? If so, please describe in detail the different types of preventive maintenance offered. A: Q: 2) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)? A: Q: 3) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separatly for each maintenance equipment or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g., one plan for a production line that consists of several pieces of equipment)? A: Q: 4) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan? Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenan If no -> Single-cycle maintenance plan A:

93 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM external management, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders are created/released? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare parts and/or tools? A: Q: 8) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types) or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance? A: Q: 9) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements. A: 6) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

8.6.1.
Questions: Q:

Warranty

1) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be listed individually for each object. A: 94 MasterData.doc 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned? 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on. A:

8.6.2.
Questions:

Service Contract

Q: 1) Do you presently separate your standard contracts by any variables (for example, document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of processing or reporting purposes? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Is the customer project contract similar to the customer project quotation? (If yes, consider creating with reference to the quotation. If no, consider creating a new project.) A: Q: 5) What are the reference numbers on the customer purchase order (PO) that relate to a project quotation? (You can enter them in the fields for additional data in the sales contract.) A: Q: 6) On which level do you monitor and control project-related revenues? (Consider the implications for selection of billing elements in the whole WBS.) A: Q: MasterData.doc 7) How do you calculate your sales price? 95 3) Do you plan revenues using SD quotations or SD orders/contracts? 2) What information do you capture on a service contract?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 8) Do you need automatic billing blocks released by the project? (If yes, consider using project milestones to release the block.) A: Q: A: Q: 10) Do you need to evaluate your projects based on multiple characteristics (for example by product line, project type, geographic location)? (If yes, consider using Profitability Analysis (PA) and settling your projects to PA.) A: Q: A: Q: A: 12) Do you negotiate contracts to use as a basis for sales orders? [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) What kind of contract do you use? 9) Do you need to define fixed dates that act as project milestones in the sales contract?

Q: 13) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract? If so, then for what reasons? A: Q: 14) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery times, commitment dates, validity periods)? A: Q: A: Q: 16) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same contract? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 17) Do you check available stock (availability check)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 96 MasterData.doc 15) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?

Q: A:

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

18) Do you adjust prices after a period of time? [ ]Yes [ ]No 19) Do you want to reprice for release orders (call-offs)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 20) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere? [ ]Yes [ ]No 21) Can you exceed these quantities in subsequent documents? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q: 22) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)? A: Q: 23) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service management)? A: Q: 24) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example to perform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 25) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to your customer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service). A: Q: 26) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24h versus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types. A: Q: 27) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the service contract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price. 97 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 28) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, what do they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spare parts that are used during a service under the contract)? A: Q: 29) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use one service contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all the customer's equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 31) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service management). A: Q: A: Q: 33) What types of text do you require on your service contracts? Are they required on output? A: Q: 34) What information in a service contract do you consider obligatory and would like to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the document as incomplete if any of this information is missing? A: Q: 35) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a service contract? If so, what are they? A: Q: A: 36) Do you send contract confirmations? If yes, how? 32) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked? 30) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?

8.6.3.
MasterData.doc

Single Cycle Plan

98

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles. A:

8.6.4.
Questions:

Multiple Counter Plan

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenance cycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles. A: Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be assigned to the individual maintenance cycles? A: Q: A: Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 7) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not within the first year. A: 99 MasterData.doc 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog? 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

ValueSAP -

Q: 8) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A: Q: 9) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with a customer service contract? A:

8.6.5.
Questions:

Strategy Plan

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance plan? A: Q: A: Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 5) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not within the first year. A: Q: 6) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A: Q: 7) Should such a preventive maintenance service be provided in conjunction with a customer service contract? A: 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog? 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

8.7.

Solution Database
100

Questions: MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Do you sell products for which detailed technical information is required in order to introduce necessary error handling? Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred (symptoms) and possible solutions. A: Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently qualified or very complex technical facts. A: Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked with a complex solution process? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error handling? A: Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling based on a knowledge or error database? Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solution database. A: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

8.7.1.
Questions: Q:

Symptom

1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3. A:

101 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

8.8.
8.8.1.

Additional Master Data

Counter/Measuring Point

Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points and counters? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A:

8.8.2.
Questions:

Catalog

Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes of defects,and usage decisions that occur when customer service work is executed? A: Q: A: 2) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

8.8.3.
Questions:

Permit

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures. A: Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions. A:

102 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

9. Plant Maintenance
9.1. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)
Questions: Q: 1) How should your technical systems be structured?

Explanation: Which components should be represented as functional locations, pieces of equipment, assemblies and so on? Are bills of material required to represent the structure of the technical system? For detailed questions about the structuring of technical systems, see the relevant technical objects. A: Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle (for example, objects that can be dismantled or used for different purposes in different production stages etc.)? A: Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)? A:

9.1.1.
Questions:

Functional Location

Q: 1) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational life (for example, clarification plants)? A: Q: A: 2) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

Q: A:

Q: 4) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost center levels, production process levels)? A: Q: 5) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional or technical viewpoints? A: 103 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 6) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)? A: Q: 10) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 12) Do you need to link documents to functional locations? [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data? 8) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be? 7) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

Q: 13) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points and counters? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 14) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No 15) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Q: A:

Q:

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you 104 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 17) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 18) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment? Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage site. If yes, you should work with functional locations. A: Q: 19) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for functional locations? A: Q: 20) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional location? Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: 21) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A: Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects 105 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A:

9.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Equipment

1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number (by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)? A: Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the manufacturer as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them. A: Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods movements)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A:

106 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment. Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment master records? If yes, give some examples. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A: Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment. A: Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting work on specific equipment? A: Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example. 107 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: A: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools? [ ]Yes [ ]No 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Q:

Explanation: Usage history A: Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A: Q: 23) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically when creating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa? Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment of corresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or asset master record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipment master record. A: Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A:

9.1.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Fleet Object

1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data? 108

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number (by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)? A: Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the manufacturer as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including costing, statistics, and so on)? A: Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them. A: Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods movements)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A: Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment. Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary. 109 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment master records? If yes, give some examples. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A: Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment. A: Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting work on specific equipment? A: Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example. A: Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: 110 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Explanation: Usage history A: Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A: Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A: Q: 23) Which types of fleet objects do you want to manage?

Explanation: Define fleet object types. A: Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?

Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for userdefined master data (business add-in). A: Q: 25) Which types of utilities and consumables do you want to maintain?

Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. A: Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?

Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. 111 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?

Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help. A: Q: 28) Which unit of consumption do you require?

Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories (for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units (for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on) A: Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption counter, time counter and so on)? A: Q: 30) How do you want to name your counters?

Explanation: IMG: Define special measurement positions for fleet objects A: Q: 31) How do you want to calculate your consumption?

Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption -> inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last? A:

9.1.4.
Questions:

Production Resource/Tool as Equipment

Q: 1) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A:

112 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically when creating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa? Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment of corresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or asset master record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipment master record. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or also based on localization, value, responsible person etc.? A: Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibrated regularly? A: 3) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

9.1.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Reference Functional Location

1) Do you have many similar technical structures in your organization?

Q: 2) Do you have standardized functional location structures that should be represented as reference functional locations? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) According to which criteria do you intend to structure your functional location hierarchies (for example geographical, functional or technical aspects)? A:

9.1.6.
Questions: Q: A:

Bill of Material for Functional Location

1) Will you use functional location BOMs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) How are they structured? 113

Q: MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes? [ ]Yes [ ]No

9.1.7.
Questions: Q: A:

Equipment Bill of Material

1) Do you have structures for special sub-items? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are structured. A: Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A: Q: A: 5) Do you currently have equipment BOMs (spare parts lists)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) If so, are they stored electronically? [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) How are equipment BOMs structured?

Q: A:

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: MasterData.doc

8) How are BOMs linked to equipment masters?

9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 114

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

10) Do you also construct BOMs with alternative materials? [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Do you use variant configuration? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

9.1.8.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Object Link

1) Do you want to define and represent horizontal object links?

2) If so, for which of the following objects do you want to display the links?

3) Which types of relationship exist between the linked objects (1:1, 1:n, n:n)?

9.1.9.
Questions:

Installed Base

Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for bills of material? Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and timebased. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables. object using the corresponding Customizing tables. A: Q: A: 2) Which object types are part of your installed base hierarchy?

115 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

9.2.

Task Lists

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements. A: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?

9.2.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

General Task List

1) Do you require configurable task lists?

2) Do you classify general task lists? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 3) How do you group your general task lists?

Explanation: Group counter A:

9.3.

Maintenance Plans

Questions: Q: 1) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)? A: Q: 2) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separately for each maintenance equipment or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g., one plan for a productionline that consists of several pieces of equipment)? A:

116 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan? Explanation: If yes -> Strategy-based maintenance plan If no -> Single-cycle maintenance plan A: Q: 4) If the maintenance plans generate service entry sheets for a MM external management, should they be directly created by the plans or after the orders are created/released? A: Q: A: Q: 6) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare parts and/or tools? A: Q: 7) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types) or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance? A: Q: 8) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements. A: 5) For what types of service object do you create maintenance items?

9.3.1.
Questions:

Single Cycle Plan

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles. A:

9.3.2.
Questions:

Multiple Counter Plan

117 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenance cycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles. A: Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be assigned to the individual maintenance cycles? A: Q: A: Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 7) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the first year. A: Q: 8) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog? 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

9.3.3.
Questions:

Strategy Plan

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance plan? 118 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 5) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the first year. A: Q: 6) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A: 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog? 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

9.4.

Solution Database

Questions: Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in order to introduce necessary error handling? Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred (symptoms) and proposed solutions. A: Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently qualified or very complex technical facts. A: Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked with a complex solution process? 119 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error handling? A: Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling based on a knowledge or error database? Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solution database. A: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

9.4.1.
Questions: Q:

Symptom

1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3. A:

9.5.
9.5.1.

Additional Master Data

Warranty

Questions: Q: 1) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 3) To which objects should warranties be assigned? 120 2) Which materials contain warranty agreements?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be listed individually for each object. A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 7) Which warranty counters are used? 5) What is the current procedure? Automatically or manually?

Explanation: For example, 12 months, 60,000 km and so on. A:

9.5.2.
Questions:

Counter/Measuring Point

Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points and counters? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A:

9.5.3.
Questions:

Revision

Q: 1) Is there any revision planned where a production line or plant has to be shut down for a certain time? A: 121 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 9.5.4.
Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to create an inspection catalog of characteristic features, causes of defects, and usage decisions that occur when maintenance work is executed? A: Q: A: 2) Describe your current catalogs and their structure.

Catalog

9.5.5.
Questions:

Permit

Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures. A: Q: 2) If yes, who in your company is authorized to issue permits?

Explanation: Maintenance of authorizations for the corresponding transactions. A:

10.
10.1.

Quality Management
QM General
Inspection Plan 10.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions and descriptions for the material inspection? Give an example for an inspection plan that you currently use and explain which critical data it contains. A: Q: 2) Are the inspection activities currently maintained in an online format and are the detailed descriptions critical to the inspection process? A: Q: 3) Will you have more than one operation in the inspection process?

122 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Example: Operation 10: Visual inspection of packaging Operation 20: Record results of laboratory analysis Describe the individual operations. (Note: Otherwise, a material specification may be sufficient for inspection processing in certain circumstances). A: Q: 4) Do you have valid inspection descriptions and operations for each individual material or for all materials? Describe them. A: Q: 5) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available, describe your specific archiving requirements. A:

10.1.2.
Questions: Q:

Work Center

1) Note: For more information see "Work Center" under "General Master Data".

Explanation: This is just a note. A: Q: 2) Do you have multiple inspection locations (work centers) per plant? Describe these locations, and identify how they are different. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Will approval procedures comply to the work center or operation? Describe this in detail. A: 3) Are inspectors assigned to a definite work center?

10.1.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Inspection Characteristic/Master Inspection Characteristic

1) Do you want to use qualitative and/or qualitative master inspection characteristics?

2) Do you want to check the control indicators?

123 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) How do you want to classify the master inspection characteristics?

Q: 4) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available, describe your specific archiving requirements. A:

10.1.4.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Processing of General Characteristics

1) Do you require value hierarchies?

2) Do you plan to use engineering change management to change characteristics?

Q: 3) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for characteristics? Which languages are relevant? How and when is the translation done? A: Q: 4) Do you maintain country-specific characteristics?

Explanation: Examples: Shoe or clothing sizes. The appropriate sizes are entered in the sales order, depending on which country the customer is in. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) What units of measure are needed for characteristic values?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

6) What characteristic groups are needed?

7) What characteristic statuses are needed?

10.1.5.
Questions:

Material Specification

124 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) You need a material specification to transfer quality inspection data to batch management. The specification completes the inspection plan or replaces it entirely, if detailed instructions are not required. (Information) A: Q: A: Q: 3) Will you transfer inspection data to the batch? If yes, to which characteristics does this apply? A: 2) Will you use material specifications as inspection criteria for your material?

10.1.6.
Questions:

Inspection Method

Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions for the inspection of characteristics? How are these currently stored? A: Q: 2) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available, describe your specific archiving requirements. A:

10.1.7.
Questions:

Catalog

Q: 1) Note: For questions about the catalog, see QM processes for results and defects recording and usage decisions Explanation: This is just a note. A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Describe your current catalogs and their structure. 2) For which data are defects/results recorded for each catalog?

10.1.8.
Questions:

Selected Set

125 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you use characteristic attributes for inspection characteristics? If yes, which attributes do you use? A: Q: 2) Which codes do you use for the usage decision? Are they specific to every inspection type? A: Q: 3) Which follow-up actions should be automatically performed after the usage decision is made? A:

10.1.9.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Sampling Scheme

1) Do you want to use special sampling schemes to calculate sample sizes?

2) How are the samples to be valuated?

Explanation: Which procedure is to be used to valuate the results in the inspection lot (for example, according to the number of nonconforming units in a lot?). A: Q: 3) Do you use tables that determine the number of parts to be withdrawn?

Explanation: This means that 'n' elements are to be taken from the delivery, for example, based on the goods receipt quantity (with or without AQL authorization). A: Q: 4) Do you want to use sampling schemes in sample-drawing procedures?

Explanation: Do you want to determine a different number of physical samples according to a default or pattern? A:

10.1.10.
Questions: Q: A:

Sampling Procedure

1) How are the sample quantities to be calculated and what criteria are to be used?

126 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) Which rules are used to accept or reject a characteristic or a sample?

Explanation: For example manually, based on a control chart and so on. A: Q: A: 3) Do you use dependent or independent multiple sampling procedures?

10.1.11.
Questions:

Dynamic Modification Rule

Q: 1) Will you define the inspection scope based on quality (this means for example, will you check processes with a consistently low quality more regularly than those processes, which constantly improve in quality)? Describe the procedure. A: Q: 2) Will you vary the sample size between a defined scope (for example, 100%) and a skip (that is, a certain number of deliveries or inspection lots have not been inspected). Describe which rotation intervals you use? A:

10.1.12.
Questions: Q: A:

Sample-Drawing Procedure

1) How do you want to calculate the sample size?

Q: 2) Which physical-sample types (for example, primary samples, pooled samples, and reserve samples) will you draw? Explanation: Settings for defining physical sample types in QM Customizing. A: Q: 3) Which physical-sample types will you process? (for example, sample from production, competitor) A:

10.1.13.
Questions:

Production Resources/Tools

Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of your materials? 127 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to manage your production resources/tools by quantity alone or also based on localization, value, responsible person etc.? A: Q: 5) Do you use production resources/tools which have to be checked or calibrated regularly? A: Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or defects and transfer to the R/3 System. A: 3) Do you require inventory management for your production resources/tools? 2) What kind of production resources/tools do you require?

10.1.14.
Questions: Q: A:

QM Order

1) In which plants should quality costs be determined?

Q: 2) Do you want to record quality costs for quality inspections? If yes, do you want to evaluate the costs collectively or for each inspection lot? Explanation: Reference to QM order types QL01 und Ql02 A: Q: 3) Do you want to record costs for quality notifications?

Explanation: Reference to QM order type QN01. A: Q: 4) How will you evaluate quality costs? Do you want to evaluate your inspection costs at goods receipt or based on the material level? 128 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Note: Order assignment in the material master for the inspection type. A: Q: 5) Which activities (for example, personel time, setup times etc) do you want to confirm for your QM order? Explanation: Note: Work center / Activity types A: Q: 6) In which period should the quality costs be settled?

Explanation: Reconciliation in CO of the time periods, in which orders are to be settled (for example, monthly, quarterly, annually). A:

10.1.15.
Questions: Q: A:

Archiving QM Objects

1) Describe your specific archiving requirements.

Q: 2) Do you want to archive master inspection characteristics? If so, provide a copy of your procedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements in detail. A: Q: 3) Do you want to archive inspection methods? If so, provide a copy of your procedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements in detail. A: Q: 4) Do you want to archive inspection plans? If so, provide a copy of your procedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements in detail. A:

10.2.

QM in Materials Management
Quality Info Record

10.2.1.
Questions:

129 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you expect quality certificates (for example, plant certificates or analysis certificates) from your suppliers before or during material shipping? Describe which document types you need and give examples. A: Q: 2) Will you require samples from your suppliers for release before shipping the goods? Describe them. A: Q: 3) Describe your vendor approval process.

Explanation: How and where is your list of approved vendors managed? Are all buyers authorized to select and approve a vendor? A: Q: 4) Will you allow conditional approvals for new vendors (for example, quantity-related or time-related limitation)? A: Q: 5) Will you monitor your vendors' quality management system (for example, ISO 9000 conformity)? Give examples of how and where you manage this data at the moment. A: Q: 6) Describe how you block a vendor and the reasons for the block.

Explanation: Is the vendor / material combination or the vendor to be blocked? A: Q: 7) Do you not want to have any inspections for some vendor/material combinations?

Explanation: Inspection control in the quality info record. A: Q: 8) Do you want source inspections instead of goods receipt inspections for certain material/vendor combinations? Explanation: Vendor source inspection in the info record. A: Q: MasterData.doc 9) Do you use quality assurance agreements that are specific to a material or vendor? 130

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Creation of quality assurance agreement in the quality info record. A: Q: 10) Will you block an incoming invoice until the quality inspection has been successfully completed or if the lot is rejected for payment? (Note: The block can be manually removed if required). A: Q: 11) Will you pre-approve a vendor sample prior to releasing the delivery? Please describe the procedure. A: Q: A: 12) Do you have model or preliminary series inspections etc?

10.3.

QM in Production
Routing

10.3.1.
Questions: Q: A:

1) For which business processes do you require routings?

Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all operations? Explanation: Scheduling without reference to an order detemines the in-house production time of a material, which you can then compare with the lot-size-dependent in-house production time from the material master. A: Q: A: 131 MasterData.doc 5) Should capacity requirements be created for the operations? 3) Do you require parallel or alternative sequences of operations within a routing?

ValueSAP -

Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your vendor will process? A: Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing purposes? A: Q: A: Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system? A: Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions, mass changes etc.)? A: Q: A: 14) Will you be measuring quality during the production process? [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)? 9) Do you want inspection operations in your routings? 8) Which objects do you want to allocate to the operations?

10.3.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc

Master Recipe

1) How many different master recipes will you need?

2) What will you use recipes for? 132

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into account? A: Q: A: Q: 7) If the control recipe destination is a person/group of people, which areas (weighing, quality inspection, production, etc.) will be affected? Do you want to represent this logical distribution according to user department or using material flow? A: Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do you want the validity of the recipe to be defined? A: Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be required (change request/order)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 13) Which type of processing do you want to be possible for operations? 133 12) Are the operations/phases be relevant for the calculation? 11) Do you want the operations/phases to create capacity requirements? 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe? 6) Which control recipe destinations will you need? 4) Will you use one recipe to produce different materials?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time, machine time, setup time)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing purposes? A: Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation (secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor, transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation A: Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production resources/tools)? A: Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being delivered to storage? A: Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics to phases)? A: Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process message)? 134 MasterData.doc 17) Which process instructions will you need? 16) Will you use milestone confirmations? 15) Will all phases be subject to confirmation?

ValueSAP A: Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes (copy function, mass changes, etc.)? A:

10.4.

QM in Sales and Distribution

QM Control in Sales

10.4.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Will you manage quality management documents (customer agreements about quality assurance and technical terms of delivery)? Give an example. A: Q: 2) Are these QM determinations customer-specific or are there additional materialdependent factors? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Would it be an advantage for you to access quality assurance documents in the R/3 System? A: 3) Will you manage electronic versions of your quality assurance agreements?

10.5.

QM in Plant Maintenance
Functional Location

10.5.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly? A: Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using functional locations? A: Q: 3) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational life (for example, clarification plants)? A: 135 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) Do you require additional functionality to structure your maintenance objects? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) If yes, which objects need to be represented with functional locations?

Q: A:

Q: 6) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost center levels, production process levels)? A: Q: 7) Is the hierarchy for functional locations structured according to spatial, functional or technical viewpoints? A: Q: 8) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 11) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)? A: Q: 12) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)? A: Q: A: Q: A: MasterData.doc 14) Do you need to link documents to functional locations? [ ]Yes 136 13) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data? 10) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be? 9) At what level(s) of the hierarchy should data be entered?

ValueSAP [ ]No Q: 15) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points and counters? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 16) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels? [ ]Yes [ ]No 17) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Q: A:

Q:

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 19) Do you classify functional locations? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: 20) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment? Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage site. If yes, you should work with functional locations. A: Q: 21) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for functional locations? A:

137 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 22) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional location? Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: 23) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A: Q: 24) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A:

10.5.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Equipment

1) Which maintenance objects must be entered as equipment master data?

2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.

3) How many pieces of equipment do you expect to manage in your system?

Q: 4) Is each individual piece of equipment in your company identified by a serial number (by your production department and/or by the manufacturer)? A: Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the manufacturer as a reference/key for that object? A: Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including costing, statistics, and so on)? A: 138 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them. A: Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods movements)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually, in order to create damage and cost analyses for them? A: Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment. Explanation: Partner functions A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment master records? If yes, give some examples. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Add other partners to the list, if necessary.

Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment. A: Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?

Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty (you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from your vendors). A: 139 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment. A: Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty check result? A: Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting work on specific equipment? A: Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example. A: Q: 19) Do you classify equipment? If yes, how?

Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them. A: Q: A: 20) Are some pieces of equipment created as production resources/tools? [ ]Yes [ ]No 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?

Q:

Explanation: Usage history A: Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional location, equipment) user-specific? Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects A: Q: 23) Do you want to generate/change a related asset automatically when creating/changing a piece of equipment, and/or vice-versa? 140 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: This is a Workflow in both directions, which requires an assignment of corresponding fields, and is activated in Customizing. Changes to the equipment and/or asset master record are also updated automatically in the corresponding asset or equipment master record. A: Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements. A:

10.5.3.
Questions:

Single Cycle Plan

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) What character does the cycle have?

Explanation: The standard R/3 System is based on periodic cycles. A:

10.5.4.
Questions:

Multiple Counter Plan

Q: 1) Should just performance-based (counter-based) or also time-based maintenance cycles be integrated into the multiple counter-based maintenance plan? A: Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?

Explanation: Cycle sets as a copy model for maintenance cycles. A: Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be assigned to the individual maintenance cycles? A: Q: A: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

141 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 7) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the first year. A: Q: 8) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A: 6) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog?

10.5.5.
Questions:

Strategy Plan

Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance plan? A: Q: A: Q: 3) If a preventive maintenance activity is completed early (before the planned date) or late (after the planned date), do you then also shift the next planned preventive maintenance activities for the same equipment? A: Q: A: Q: 5) List the different maintenance cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance activities should be based. Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the first year. 142 MasterData.doc 4) When should preventive maintenance tasks appear in your order backlog? 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?

ValueSAP A: Q: 6) Do you want to plan maintenance independently of your hierarchy of technical objects? A:

10.6.

Solution Database

Questions: Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in order to introduce necessary error handling? Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred (symptoms) and proposed solutions. A: Q: 2) Is the offer of a solution database helpful for the notification processor?

Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently qualified or very complex technical facts. A: Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked with a complex solution process? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error handling? A: Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling based on a knowledge or error database? Explanation: Transfer of already-identified errors and proposed solutions to the solution database. A: 4) Is there a bottleneck in specialist knowledge in your area?

10.6.1.
MasterData.doc

Symptom
143

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Structure existing problems based on criteria?

Explanation: If yes, possible use of catalogs (code groups, codes) in R/3. A:

11.

Environment, Health and Safety

Questions: Q: 1) Do you currently obtain your MSDS phrases, hazardous substance data, ICD codes, EWC codes, and so on from content providers? A: Q: 2) Do you use in phrases in such a large number of languages that you need a number of code pages (for example, 1100, 1500, 8000)? Explanation: If so, EH&S Language Support must be initialized in Customizing. A:

11.1.

Product Safety

Questions: Q: 1) How is your environmental protection organization structured (structure, responsibilities)? A:

11.1.1.
Questions:

Substance

Q: 1) Do you handle hazardous substances (classified as such by chemicals laws)? How many different substances? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Are you the first in your country to use or import some hazardous substances? How many substances? A: 144 MasterData.doc 2) Are dangerous goods produced in your enterprise? Roughly how many?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) To which countries do you deliver hazardous substances?

Q: 5) Should dangerous goods data/information be entered in the database or merely kept as safety data sheets? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) What are the existing types of substances, for example, pure substances, hazardous substances, products, preparations, other? A: Q: 9) Which views does your substance master have, for example, physical-chemical data, toxicological data, legal requirements, legal ratings, proven technical knowledge? A: Q: 10) Are you familiar with the EH&S standard properties tree and to what extent does it fulfill your requirements? A: Q: 11) Is your substance data subject to different levels of confidentiality. Which ones (internal, official, released, other)? A: Q: A: Q: 13) For which jurisdictions do you enter substance data and/or create substance reports, for example, EU, USA, Japan? A: Q: A: 145 MasterData.doc 14) Which data provider supplies your data and in what format? 12) Do you have a detailed authorization concept? Describe it. 7) What format does this legacy data have? 6) Is there any legacy data and what is its status?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

15) Which substance names, numbers, and formulas do you use?

16) Do you distribute your substance data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

Q: 17) What relationship exists between your substances and your materials, for example 1:1, 1:n, n:m, other? A: Q: 18) Do you maintain the notification status for your products? If so, for which substance lists? A:

11.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Phrase

1) Do your legacy systems contain phrases?

2) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

Q: 3) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or replaced? A: Q: A: Q: A: 5) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)? 4) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

11.1.3.
Questions:

Report

Q: 1) Which categories of substance reports do you use and/or create, for example, MSDS, labels, TREMcards, standard operating procedures, other? 146 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do the contents and the structure of the standard report templates fulfill your requirements? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you want to define your own objects for report management in addition to the existing objects "person who had accident, material master, substance master, work area"? A: 11) Do you want to save the historical report documents? 10) Do you want to log the return of the acknowledgement of receipt? 9) Do you want to work with acknowledgements of receipt? 8) Do you want to set up an output check for the shipping order? 7) How do you want to set up the shipping process (status network)? 6) How is the recipient of your substance reports determined? 5) How is shipping of your substance reports triggered? 4) How many different material safety data sheets exist in your enterprise? 2) Do you label used waste containers?

147 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

11.2.

Dangerous Goods Management

Questions: Q: 1) How is the dangerous goods organization in your enterprise governed and which enterprise area performs which tasks? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which areas also require read access to dangerous goods data and for what purpose? A: Q: 4) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and dangerous goods management organized in your enterprise? Explanation: Important for link between accident reports in accordance with the German dangerous goods officer directive (GbV) and incident/accident management (workers' compensation association). A: Q: 5) How is cooperation between product safety, waste management, and dangerous goods management organized (phrases, substance properties)? A: 2) Are external enterprises used to transport dangerous goods?

11.2.1.
Questions: Q: A:

Dangerous Goods

1) Do you ship dangerous goods that require labeling?

Q: 2) On the basis of which validity areas/regulations are dangerous goods shipped, for example, IMDG, IATA, ADR, 49 CFR? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which shipping types are used in connection with the modes of transport, for example, road (shipping company), postal service, parcel service, courier service? 148 MasterData.doc 3) Which modes of transport are used for shipping: road, sea, air, rail, inland waterway?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you have different UN numbers for different dangerous goods regulations in your product range? A: Q: 7) Do you want to transfer dangerous goods data from existing systems or obtain data from providers? A: Q: A: Q: 9) Which product groups do you have to classify as dangerous goods, for example, paints, solvents, key chemicals? A: Q: 10) How many different dangerous goods ratings do you have? How big is your dangerous goods product range? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 13) Should dangerous goods be classified (EHS expert)? 12) Which other dangerous goods checks do you need? 11) Which dangerous goods checks do you want to perform? 8) Which data provider supplies you with regulations data and in what format? 5) Do you make use of exceptions and exemptions when transporting dangerous goods?

11.2.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Phrase

1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

149 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or replaced? A: Q: A: 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

11.2.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q:

TREMcard

1) Are there completed tremcards available in your enterprise? In what format are they?

2) Are these existing tremcards individual, collective, class, or group tremcards?

3) Do you have tremcards in different languages?

4) Do you want to transfer the existing tremcards?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents. A:

11.2.4.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Dangerous Goods Documents

1) Are transport documents created in your enterprise or are they created externally?

2) Are transport documents created with EDP support?

11.3.

Waste

Questions: Q: A: 1) How is waste management organized in your enterprise (centrally, decentrally)?

150 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and waste management organized in your enterprise? A: Q: 10) How is cooperation between waste management and dangerous goods management organized in your enterprise (phrases, substance properties)? A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you want to distribute waste costs proportionally among the cost centers that generated the waste (coordination with FI-CO)? A: Q: 13) Is purchasing organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with MM)? 151 MasterData.doc 11) Is legacy data available in electronic format that is to be transferred? 8) Is waste management organized to be cross-plant (number of plants)? 7) Is waste management organized to be cross-company code? 6) Are there any disposal channels that are not predefined? 5) Do you have central/decentral accumulation points? 4) Do you perform on-site disposal? 3) Are external enterprises given the task of disposal processing? 2) Which validity area does this waste management have?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 18) Do you exchange data with external service agents? 17) How are your waste generator numbers structured? 16) Do you distribute your master data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)? 15) Do you have detailed requirements for an authorization concept? 14) Is sales organized centrally or decentrally (coordination with SD)?

11.3.1.
11.3.1.1. Questions: Q: A:

Waste Master
Material Master

1) How many types of waste are produced in your enterprise?

Q: 2) Are there materials for this waste which you have to take back (for example, for packaging materials) ? A: Q: 3) Are there any wastes of similar types that may have to be assigned to different waste codes (owing to origin or disposer)? A: 11.3.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you also use internal company waste descriptions parallel to the descriptions in official waste catalogs? 152 MasterData.doc 1) Which are the jurisdictions for which you enter waste properties and/or create reports? Specifications

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 11.3.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you manage a number of waste catalogs? 1) How hazardous are your wastes? Waste Code/Waste Catalog 3) Do you make your own waste analyses and do you manage them in the system?

11.3.2. Waste Generator/Waste Disposer/Waste Transporter/Authority

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Are there different disposal channels for one and the same waste (price/quantity selection, interface to MM)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 153 MasterData.doc 7) Do you perform the tasks of a waste disposer? 6) Do waste approval books need to be created by the disposer for the waste generator? 4) Do you perform the tasks of a waste transporter? 3) How do you assign wastes? 2) Where are internal points of waste generation defined/structured in your enterprise? 1) Are wastes generated that are sent abroad?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

8) Which authorities are responsible for you?

11.3.3.
Questions:

Waste Approval

Q: 1) Are waste approvals managed or created with EDP support (specification database or inbound document)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Are waste quantities recorded and managed in conjunction with the waste approval procedure? A: Q: 4) Is the handover of wastes recorded and managed (note: dock receipts, waste manifests)? Explanation: Basis for creating waste life-cycle analyses with EDP support. A: Q: 5) In addition to the data for waste approvals, is data on transporters and disposal facilities stored electronically (for example, planned disposal facilities, scope of a transport license)? A: Q: 6) Are other documentation and approval obligations managed by external service agents in conjunction with the waste approval procedure? A: Q: 7) Are the costs in connection with the waste approval procedure (creating, analyses etc.) entered and managed? A: Q: A: 154 MasterData.doc 8) Which types of waste approval exist? 2) Which data is managed in conjunction with waste approvals?

ValueSAP -

11.4.

Industrial Hygiene and Safety

Questions: Q: 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners?

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: report recipient, external persons, physician, hospital. A: Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects are required: exposure group, position. A: Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted. A: Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined. A: Q: 5) Do you use SAP Plant Maintenance (PM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain functions for technical safety measures and incident/accident management will be restricted. A: Q: 6) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: If not, this means certain hazardous substance register functions will be restricted. A: Q: 7) Do you use SAP Production Planning (PP)?

Explanation: Necessary for integration of work area/work center. 155 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 8) Which companies is your industrial hygiene and safety organization responsible for and in which jurisdiction are they based? A: Q: 9) How is industrial hygiene and safety and the role of safety officer organized in your enterprise (area) and which enterprise area performs which tasks? A: Q: 10) How is the industrial hygiene and safety organization mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management. A: Q: 11) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health organized in your enterprise? Explanation: Important for data transfer between injury/illness log and incident/accident management. A: Q: 12) How is cooperation between product safety and industrial hygiene and safety organized in your enterprise? Explanation: Coordination of the use of phrases, substance properties. A: Q: A: Q: 14) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective areas of responsibility? A: Q: 15) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and evaluating master data and movement data? A: 13) Are external service agents used to perform tasks and which tasks do they perform?

156 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 16) Do you maintain a personal protection equipment catalog in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented as its own material group (MM). A: Q: 17) Do you use maintenance plans in your enterprise?

Explanation: Implemented using Plant Maintenance (PM), maintenance plans. A: Q: 18) Do you want health and safety briefings in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support? Explanation: Until this function has been included in the EH&S component, Training and Event Management (HR, company instructions) is used to provide the function. A: Q: 19) Do you want qualification measures (safety officers) in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support? Explanation: Using Training and Event Management. A: Q: 20) Do you want site inspections in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support?

Explanation: Implemented in risk assessment (checklist, safety measure tracking). A:

11.4.1.
Questions: Q: A:

Phrase

1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?

Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or replaced? A: Q: A: 157 MasterData.doc 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) Do you distribute your phrases to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?

11.4.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Work Area

1) How many work areas are there in your enterprise?

2) What work areas and work area categories are there?

Explanation: The use of patterns (sample work areas) can reduce the amount of time and effort needed to enter and update data. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which IHS data do you want to appear in standard operating procedures? 3) How are the work areas structured (hierarchical work area structure)?

Explanation: Work area-related and/or substance-related agent types are possible; specific information is stored directly under the work area. A: Q: 5) How do you assign the work area to existing organizational structures (plant, cost center, storage location, work center, functional location)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Are there any existing work areas in your legacy system that can be used? 6) Do you have specific software for managing your work areas? Which software is this?

11.4.3.
Questions: Q:

Agent (Industrial Hygiene and Safety)

1) Which data is managed within the scope of the work center and risk assessment? 158

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances, noise, psychological factors)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you use exposure groups? 4) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise? 2) Do you use operation statuses to differentiate exposure situations in work areas?

Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure groups should be selected carefully. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, or other)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 11) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use? 10) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries? 8) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies? 7) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly? 6) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

159 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 12) Do you have specific software for managing your agent data? Which software is this? A: Q: A: 13) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?

11.4.4.
Questions:

Accident

Q: 1) Do you only document accidents that have to be reported or all incidents with or without injury to persons? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which accident reports do you require? 2) Do you record cross-group and cross-country statistics for incidents and accidents?

Explanation: Only the German accident report is available. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you have any special software for managing incident/accident data? Which software is this? A: 7) Do you use workers' compensation association keys or similar to classify accidents? 6) Do you use questionnaires for incident/accident analysis? 5) Do you track follow-up activities for incidents and accidents? 4) Do you track times and costs for incidents and accidents?

160 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 9) Is there any existing incident/accident data in your legacy system that needs to be transferred? A:

11.4.5.
Questions: Q:

Safety Measures

1) Which of the following safety measure categories do you use?

Explanation: Only technical safety measure categories can be tracked subsequently in Plant Maintenance (PM). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 4) Which other safety measure types do you need? 3) Which of the following safety measure types do you use? 2) Which other safety measure categories do you need?

11.4.6.
Questions:

Report

Q: 1) Are there any completed standard operating procedures in your enterprise? In which format are they? A: Q: 2) Are the existing standard operating procedures related to substances or work areas or both? A: Q: 3) Do you want to transfer the existing standard operating procedures?

Explanation: Transfer as inbound documents. A:

11.5.

Occupational Health

Questions: Q: MasterData.doc 1) Do you use SAP Business Partners? 161

ValueSAP -

Explanation: The following roles have been defined: health center, physician, laboratory. A: Q: 2) Do you use SAP Organizational Management?

Explanation: The following objects can be used: exposure group, position, job, task. A: Q: 3) Do you use SAP Personnel Administration?

Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted. A: Q: 4) Do you use SAP Time Management?

Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined. A: Q: 5) Do you use SAP Materials Management (MM)?

Explanation: Usage possible for inventory management in Occupational Health. A: Q: 6) Do you have one or more of your own health centers or do you work with external service agents? A: Q: 7) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health organized in your enterprise? A: Q: A: Q: A: 162 MasterData.doc 9) Do you support other enterprises as a service provider? 8) Are you responsible for a number of countries?

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) How is occupational health including first-aiders and company paramedics organized in your enterprise (area) and which enterprise areas perform which tasks? A: Q: 11) How is occupational health mapped in data processing?

Explanation: Modeling via Organizational Management. A: Q: 12) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective areas of responsibility? A: Q: 13) Do you want to document medical examination results in addition to the legal requirements (protocol log)? A: Q: 14) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and evaluating master data and movement data? A: Q: 15) Do you want qualification measures (first-aiders) in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support? Explanation: Via Training and Event Management. A: Q: 16) How do you schedule your appointments?

Explanation: By telephone, invitation list, mail, workflow? A: Q: 17) Do you want to document occupational diseases?

Explanation: Limited possibilities via incident/accident log (incident/accident management). A:

11.5.1.
Questions:

Agent (Occupational Health)

163

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances, noise, psychological factors)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you use exposure groups? 2) How many individual agents are there in total in your enterprise?

Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure groups should be selected carefully. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 7) Which reference values do the exposure levels relate to (legal, enterprise-specific, or other)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 10) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used? 9) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use? 8) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries? 6) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies? 5) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly? 4) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?

11.5.2.
Questions:

Protocols
164

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

1) Which regulatory health surveillance protocols are necessary in your enterprise?

2) Which of the following health surveillance protocol types do you use?

Q: 3) Which of the following occupational health services does your Occupational Health dept. offer? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you have health surveillance protocols and appointments in your legacy system (protocol log) that are to be transferred? A: 5) Are you responsible for a number of countries and jurisdictions? 4) Which other occupational health services does your enterprise offer?

11.5.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Medical Examinations

1) Which medical examinations are necessary in your enterprise?

Q: 2) Do you have an assignment between medical examinations and health surveillance protocols? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 165 MasterData.doc 5) Do you have examination results in your legacy system that are to be transferred? 4) Do you require interfaces to medical devices (for example, an audiometer)? 3) Do you want to transfer laboratory data automatically?

ValueSAP 11.5.4.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you save the results of the medical tests (blood count, audiograms, and so on)? 1) Which tests are assigned to your medical examinations?

Medical Tests

11.5.5.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Questionnaire

1) Do occupational health questionnaires already exist in your enterprise?

2) Are the questionnaires evaluated mechanically?

3) Are you interested in automatic questionnaire scanning?

4) Are you interested in online answering (intranet, Internet)?

5) Do you require questionnaires in a number of languages?

11.5.6.
Questions:

Question Catalog

Q: 1) Does a collection of occupational health questions already exist which are coded for statistics purposes? Explanation: It is advisable to convert existing questions with user-defined answers to questions with answer criteria in order to make them easier to evaluate. A:

11.5.7.
Questions:

Diagnosis Key

166 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you use your own diagnosis keys? 1) Do you use ICD codes?

11.5.8.
Questions:

Injury/Illness Log

Q: 1) Do you want to maintain other activities (administering medication, advice etc.) in addition to first aid services (first aid log)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Are injury/illness log entries also to be made for external employees? 6) Is there any existing data in your legacy system that you want to transfer? 5) Do you have a specific software program for keeping the first aid log? 4) Which of these types do you want to transfer to incident/accident management? 3) Do you require other types in addition? 2) Which of the following types of injury/illness log entry do you want to use?

11.5.9.
Questions: Q:

Reports

1) Which of the predefined reports for the medical service do you require?

Explanation: In SAPscript form. A:

167 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

12.
12.1.

Project Management
Standard structures
Questions: Q: 1) As some project data (such as settlement rules) do not feature in standard structures, consider using operative structures as a better template. A: Q: 2) As standard project structures are not authorizations objects, you cannot check who is allowed to copy them. Consider using operative structures as a better template? A:

12.1.1.
Questions:

Standard milestone

Q: 1) Do you have a general list of milestones that you typically use for your projects (such as billing with milestones)? (If yes, consider using standard milestones and milestone groups.) A:

12.1.2.
Questions:

Standard network

Q: 1) Are the tasks you perform very similar from project to project? (If yes, consider using standard networks.) A: Q: 2) Do you have a standard list of materials for your activities? (If yes, consider assigning materials to the standard network.) A: Q: 3) Are the same resources and their time requirements used repeatedly in different projects? (If yes, consider using standard networks to plan work.) A: Q: 4) Do you have specific variations on activities that you can identify by specific categories? (If yes, consider using configuration in combination with standard networks.) A:

12.1.3.
Questions:

Standard WBS

168 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you have projects which are variations of standard projects? 1) Do you want to use existing project structures as templates for future projects?

12.2.

General
PS text

12.2.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you want to record general information on your projects? (If yes, consider using the PS text feature). A: Q: 2) PS Text allows you to use general office functions (for example, to mail this information). Do you need to share this information with other people involved in the projects? A:

12.2.2.
Questions:

Delivery information

Q: 1) You can maintain default values for the shipping point, goods recipient, and sales organization for a delivery from a project. Do you want to use the functions for deliveries from projects? A:

12.2.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Third Party Delivery Address

1) Do you want to maintain third-party addresses before using them in deliveries?

12.2.4.
Questions:

Project Classification

Q: 1) If you required classification for project objects, use class 13 for networks and class 14 for the WBS. A:

169 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

12.3.

Project structure
Responsible cost center

12.3.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you have departments that are responsible for each WBS element? (If yes, consider using the responsible cost center field since it can also be used as a hierarchy in the information system) A:

12.3.2.
Questions:

Requesting cost center

Q: 1) Are there departments which can request or generate requirements for a project/WBS element? (If yes, you can use the requesting cost center field because it can be used as hierarchy in the information system.) A:

12.4.

Work center

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Are you going to be scheduling labor resources within your networks? (If yes, use workcenters.) A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you tend to plan labor resources at a department or individual level? (For both, consider the work center capacity and HR assignment configuration requirements). A: Q: 6) It is possible to have a work center that includes both people and machines. Do you have multiple uses for your work centers? A: 170 MasterData.doc 4) Will you be doing cost planning on networks? (If yes, you will need work centers.) 2) Will you be using the PP module? (If yes, refer to the questions for PP work centers.) 1) Are work center hierarchies required for capacity evaluation?

ValueSAP -

Q: 7) The work center controls the formula for controlling scheduling. Do you have special work center scheduling requirements? A: Q: 8) Work centers provide the basis for capacity planning. Do you want to manage capacities for your projects? A: Q: 9) Will you be using PP and PS functionality? (If yes, carefully consider the integration and processes between the PP and PS work centers for capacity planning.) A:

13.
13.1.

Financial Accounting
G/L Account
Questions: Q: 1) What procedure do you use when you need to create new account numbers?

Explanation: This can occur centrally or decentralized; Sample accounts can be used. A: Q: 2) Can you define groups of general ledger accounts that require similar information in the master record? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which accounts do you wish to manage on an open item basis (for example, bank clearing accounts)? A: Q: 6) Which accounts do you wish to maintain in foreign currency (for example, bank accounts)? 171 MasterData.doc 4) For which general ledger accounts do you wish to display line items? 3) How many retained earnings accounts do you have?

ValueSAP A: Q: 7) Describe any special requirements when posting to particular general ledger accounts (for example, expense accounts require an associated cost center). A: Q: 8) What criteria do you use to search for G/L accounts?

Explanation: Matchcode A: Q: A: 9) Which of your General Ledger accounts are not relevant to tax?

13.2.

Ledger

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you have special statutory accounting requirements that are not covered in other R/3 applications? Example: Currency translation of a foreign subsidiary, different fiscal year ends to the international trading partner. Explanation: A special type of rendering of accounts is meant, which requires a characteristic not contained in a standard SAP database. A: Q: A: 3) Have you defined the necessary domains and data elements in the ABAP Dictionary? 1) Do you have to report in accordance with cost of sales accounting?

13.3.

Legal Consolidation
Item

13.3.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)? Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial statements can be created parallel according to different requirements. 172 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement? A: Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data reported - on account level or item level? A: Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category". Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. the unit integration. A: Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings 173 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A:

13.3.2.
Questions: Q:

Subitem

1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? A: Q: A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

13.3.3.
Questions: Q:

Sets (Namespace)

1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets. A:

13.4.

Funds Management

Questions: Q: 1) Describe the relationship between the Financial Accounting fiscal year and the Funds Management fiscal year (Budget year/ budget periods) A: Q: 2) Provide more details on the number of budget periods, special adjustment periods and description of what is accomplished/processed in this special periods. A: Q: 3) Are there special budgetary structures to cover interim periods / special periods (e.g. if budget has not been approved in time: provisional budgets)? How are these structures related to the budget structures of the adopted budget? A: Q: 4) Please provide detail information on legal requirements within the budget management sector (Financial regulations, internal rules, ....) 174 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 5) Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget/master data hierarchy) and the current nomenclature/scale. Create a list of the organizational units that are responsible for the budget (execution). Explanation: Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget hierarchy). Please explain the current existing nomenclature/numbering (list the organizational units that are responsible for the budget) A: Q: A: Q: 7) Is it possible to categorize the types of expenditure? Create a list of expenditure types/categories and describe how these relate to the execution level. A: Q: 8) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) within a year. A: Q: 9) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) over a period of years. A: Q: A: Q: 11) Describe which information objects (master data) have to remain online in the system, and for how long. A: Q: A: Q: 13) Explain which legacy data (historical data) needs to be transferred from the previous system to Funds Management (level of detail, number of years, ...). A: 175 MasterData.doc 12) Provide an overview of the volume of master data (FM). 10) Describe the quantity and timing of changes of the budget structure 6) Are there any legal requirements for nomenclature /structure of the master data?

ValueSAP 13.4.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the funds center? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) Generate a list of all information to be stored at funds center level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information could be changed for a funds center? Create a list of all fields/field contents. A:

Funds Center

13.4.2.
Questions:

Commitment Item

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the commitment item? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) List the information to be stored at commitment item level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information may possibly be changed for a commitment item? Generate a list of all fields/field contents. A:

13.4.3.
Questions:

Fund

Q: 1) Generate a list of funds origins (funds, funds from secondary sources). Are these funds from secondary sources budgeted and assigned separately? Should these funds be displayed separately for budgeting and execution? A: Q: 2) Provide an overview of the different fund types (for example, special revenue, donations,....). A: 176 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 4) Do you receive grants? If so, provide detailed information (USA). 3) Provide a list and a short description of your budget sources.

Explanation: If you manage different funds (financing subsidies): Describe the characteristics/special features/Funds Management requirements for these funds (life, reporting period, special features with reference to the budget and budget execution). A: Q: 5) If you manage different funds (grants): Describe the characteristics/special features/FM requirements for the fund (lifetime, reporting periods, special features with regard to budget and budget execution). A: Q: 6) Is it possible to group the used funds (from secondary sources)? If so, describe the groups and the funds belonging to them. A: Q: 7) Do you have special funds for internal services? How do you distribute the accrued expenses to other funds? A: Q: 8) Do you have to produce financial statements by funds, fund groups, or fund types? Provide an overview of those funds. (USA) A: Q: 9) Are budget/actual reports produced for funds/fund groups/fund type levels? Provide an overview. A: Q: 10) Is there any special nomenclature (organization) for the name of the fund? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 11) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 12) Which information could be changed for a fund? Create a list of all fields/field contents. 177 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you have grants (to be repaid, or not to be repaid) that are part of your budget but are managed separately? If so, provide detailed information. A: 13) Do you have endowment funds? If so, please provide detailed information.

13.4.4.
Questions:

Application of Funds

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the application of funds? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information may possibly changed for an application of funds? Generate a list of all fields/field contents. A:

14.
14.1.

Treasury
General
Business Partner 14.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) What "categories" do you use to distinguish between different types of business partner? A: Q: A: Q: A: 178 3) Are the partners related to each other? 2) Are your business partners natural persons, legal persons, or both?

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 14.1.2.
Questions: Q: 1) Which bank accounts do you use to process payments for your money market transactions? A: Q: A: 2) Provide an overview of your house banks (the banks you have accounts with).

House Banks

14.1.3.
Questions:

Limits

Q: 1) For each limit, specify which flows should be included in the calculation (only assets, only liabilities, both assets and liabilities) and whether the amounts should be added or subtracted. A:

14.2.

Treasury Management
Class

14.2.1.
Questions: Q: A:

1) Make a qualified estimate of your average positions for each class (annual average).

Q: 2) Specify the quantities for each product group (number of securities accounts, number of positions per securities account, number of classes). A: Q: A: 3) Which fields do you require for master data maintenance?

14.2.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Reference

1) For what purposes do you use reference links between transactions?

14.2.3.
Questions:

Securities Account

179 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to group your securities accounts into position valuation units (across several securities accounts)? A: Q: 3) How do you split the positions in securities accounts that are not part of the premium reserve fund into residual assets, restricted assets and unencumbered assets? (Germany) A: 1) How many securities accounts do you have at present?

14.2.4.
Questions:

Position Indicator

Q: 1) How do you structure the balance sheet accounts for securities in the general ledger (determination of account assignment reference)? A:

14.2.5.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Market Data

1) Which rates/prices do you need to value your positions?

2) How do you currently update your security prices (automatically or manually)?

14.3.

Loans
Loan Products

14.3.1.
Questions: Q: A:

1) Is there a product sheet or product description for loans?

Q: 2) According to which criteria have you classified your loan portfolio (for example, according to product, term, ...)? A: Q: A: 180 MasterData.doc 3) Do you manage loans given and/or loans taken?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

4) Roughly categorize the types of loan you manage.

5) Do you manage foreign currency loans?

6) Do you post loans on the basis of customer accounts? (are payments monitored?)

14.3.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Collateral

1) To what extent do you manage assigned loans (undisclosed assignments)?

Q: 2) To what extent do you manage guaranteed loans? Who are the relevant guarantors? To which loan products do guarantees apply? A: Q: 3) Do you process grants/subsidies to borrowers in conjunction with the relevant institutions? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) Which basic data / assignment data do you enter in relation to collateral? 5) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)? 4) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

14.3.3.
Questions:

Collateral Objects

Q: 1) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technical department, external expert)? A: 181 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

2) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

3) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

14.3.4.
Questions:

Filed Documents

Q: 1) Do you intend to use file management to control the loan process (e.g. have all the required documents been received?), or merely to archive the filed documents? A: Q: A: 2) What kind of documents do you have to administer?

14.3.5.
Questions:

Condition Structure

Q: 1) Which different condition structures do you use (annuities, installments, final repayment)? To which product categories do they apply? A: Q: 2) What are the resulting condition types (nominal interest, annuity repayment, commitment interest)? A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Do you send contract offers or contracts to the customer? Do you apply standard conditions or grant individual conditions? A: Q: A: Q: 6) How do you deal with loan discounts and premiums? 182 MasterData.doc 5) Which effective interest method do you use? 3) To what extent do you manage variable-rate loans? Which loans are they?

ValueSAP A:

14.4.

Market Risk Management

Questions: Q: A: 1) Should valuations be differentiated according to the bid/ask rates?

14.4.1.
Questions: Q: A:

Reference Interest Rate

1) Which reference interest rates are required?

14.4.2.
Questions:

Yield Curves

Q: 1) Which yield curves are required? Which reference interest rates (interfaces) should be used as a basis for defining the yield curves? A:

14.4.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Volatility

1) Do you use option instruments? Which?

2) Do you require your own volatility type for value at risk calculations?

14.4.4.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Reporting

1) Which market data parameters are used for position valuation?

2) Which product types do you want to value differently from the standard?

Q: 3) Which additional flows (such as premiums or charges) do you want to include in the valuation? 183 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: For additional flows you use flow category '90'. A:

14.4.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions

1) Should the net present values calculated by the system be saved?

Q: 2) Do you want to include net present values that have been calculated externally in the mark-to-market position valuation? A:

14.4.6.
Questions: Q: A:

Scenario

1) Which market data simulations do you want to carry out?

14.4.7.
Questions: Q: A:

Market Data Shift

1) Do you want to incorporate relative changes to market data in your evaluations?

14.4.8.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Statistics Type

1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

2) Do you want to calculate your volatilities and correlations?

14.4.9.
Questions: Q: A:

Correlation

1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

184 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 14.4.10.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Which risk factors do you want to consider for your risk evaluations? 1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations?

Risk Hierarchy

15.
15.1.

Revenue and Cost Controlling

Overhead Cost Controlling
Cost Element
Primary Cost Element 15.1.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Reserve a number range in the chart of accounts for the definition of CO-specific accounts/primary cost elements: which additional primary cost elements do you need (such as for accruals)? A: 15.1.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 15.1.1.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Define cost element groups for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes. Cost Element Group 1) Define secondary cost elements for planning, allocation and reporting purposes. Secondary Cost Element 1) Define primary cost elements based on the definition of the chart of account.

15.1.1.

15.1.2.
15.1.2.1. Questions:

Cost Center
Cost Center

Q: 1) Define cost centers as the lowest level in your organizational structure at which you hold one person responsible for the expenses incurred (check whether you have covered the whole organization). 185 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 15.1.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Take your corporate organizational structure and build a hierarchy according to levels of responsibilities, with cost centers as the lowest level. A: 15.1.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Besides the standard hierarchy, do you need other alternative structure (groups) of cost centers (for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes)? A: Cost Center Group Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers

15.1.3.
15.1.3.1. Questions:

Activity Type
Activity Type

Q: 1) Define the type of activity performed by each cost center. Do this by defining one or more measurable activity type(s) for each cost center. A: Q: 2) Since activity types are posted as secondary cost elements, have you specified the secondary cost elements to which you want to assign the activity type (one-to-one, or one cost element for more than one activity type)? A: 15.1.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Group your activity types into different categories or similar attributes for planning, allocation and reporting purposes. A: Activity Type Group

15.1.4.
15.1.4.1. Questions:

Statistical Key Figures

Statistical Key Figures

Q: 1) Which statistical key figures do you want to use for allocations and reporting (such as telephone units, headcount, and so on)? A: 15.1.4.2. Statistical Key Figure Group 186 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Define groups of statistical key figures (such as the group for all headcount statistical figures). A:

15.1.5.
15.1.5.1. Questions:

Business Process
Business Process

Q: 1) Do you want to define business processes across different areas of your organization and plan, enter, and allocate overhead costs on the basis of these? Explanation: Unlike activity types, business processes can receive costs from more than one cost center. The process costs can then either be allocated to Cost Object Controlling, or to Profitability Analysis. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Define your business processes (such as sales-order processing).

Q: A:

15.1.5.2. Questions:

Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes

Q: 1) Define the standard hierarchy of processes for planning, allocating and reporting business process costs. A: 15.1.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you group your business processes alternatively by categories or similar attributes so that you can plan, allocate and report on aggregated levels? A: Business Process Group

15.1.6.
Questions:

Internal Order

Q: 1) What business criteria do you use to classify your internal orders (for example, overhead orders, accrual orders, investment orders, statistical orders, and so on)? A: Q: 2) What are the types of orders that will be used in the controlling area (such as investments, marketing, etc.)? 187 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 3) Should some of the orders be used for information purposes only - that is, should the real posting be on the cost center? A:

15.2.

Product Cost Controlling

Procurement Alternative

15.2.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Are you working with multiple supply sources (different vendors) or multiple production methods (in-house production and subcontracting) for the same material? A:

15.2.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q:

Cost Component

1) Define the structure of your product cost components (40 cost components max)!

2) Which cost components should be part of the product`s standard price?

3) Define the calculation method for each cost component.

Explanation: Define the calculation method for each cost component: 1. Activity quantity x activity price 2. Material quantity x price (standard price, moving average price, purchasing info record......) 3. Process quantity x process price 4. Percentage overhead A: Q: 4) Do you require an alternative structure that breaks down the activity and process costs in accordance with their original costs (such as wages, salaries, energy, depreciation)? A: Q: 5) Which cost components should be part of the product's cost of goods manufactured in Profitability Analysis? A:

15.2.3.
Questions:

Product Cost Collectors

188 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost collector for each production method or for each material? A:

15.2.4.
Questions:

Material Ledger Data

Q: 1) Do you intend to value the material with more than one currency or valuation approach? What are those currencies/approaches? A: Q: 2) Do you want to make subsequent allocations of variances (from purchasing, production) for raw materials and material produced in-house? A: Q: 3) Do you want to differentiate between procurement alternatives and manufacturing processes for your actual costs? A:

15.3.

Profitability Analysis
Characteristics
Characteristic Definition 15.3.1.1.

15.3.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) List the dimensions (characteristics) that you want to create contribution margin accounting for, according to your reporting requirements. Explanation: Examples of characteristics: - Region - Sales organization - ... A: 15.3.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) For the characteristics defined in the previous question, specify values (such as, regions: North, west, east, south) A: 15.3.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) List the terms (characteristics) that do not have master data, and state how they are dependent on other criteria. A: 189 MasterData.doc Characteristic Derivation Characteristic Values

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) List the terms (characteristics) that are dependent on each other in a hierarchy.

Explanation: Examples: Determine sales office, region A:

15.3.2.
15.3.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Value Fields
Definition of Value Fields

1) Define the report rows (value fields) that you wish to analyze.

Q: 2) Are you interested only in the revenues and costs that are directly related to product sales? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you also wish to see other income or expenditures that are not related to your regular business activity (e.g. product production or sales)? A: Q: 5) Decide which value fields can be posted as reconcilable with FI (true), and which are to be filled with accrual valuations. A: 3) Do you also wish to see other product-related overhead costs?

15.3.3.
15.3.3.1. Questions:

Condition Types
Definition of Condition Types

Q: 1) Do you want information on accrued values for your result information, that are not defined as conditions in SD, or do you require user-defined condition types in CO-PA for planning purposes? A:

16.

Enterprise Controlling

190 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

16.1.

Consolidation
Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy

16.1.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)? Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial statements can be created parallel according to different requirements. A: Q: 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement? A: Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data reported - on account level or item level? A: Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category". Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. the unit integration. 191 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings A:

16.1.2.
Questions:

Breakdown Categories

Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Which different details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts? Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. The details are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics A: Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency. currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

16.1.3.
Questions:

Custom Characteristics

Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standard subassignments? Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settings should occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes are extremely problematic A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes how many and which characteristics? 192 MasterData.doc

Q:

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Number of characteristics: Which characteristic values: A:

16.1.4.
Questions:

Subitem Category

Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you have for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports, segment reports, etc. ? Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region - Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type A:

16.1.5.
Questions: Q:

Subitem

1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? A: Q: A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

16.1.6.
Questions: Q:

Sets (Namespace)

1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets. A:

17.

Asset Accounting
Questions: Q: 1) How many fixed assets and how many assets under construction do you currently have? 193

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you see a business need to use both internal and external number assignment, depending on the asset class? If so, please specify. A: Q: 5) If you use external number assignment, do you want to allow the assignment of alphanumeric numbers? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do you want asset master record numbering to be internally or externally assigned? 2) Which organizational units do you manage in the asset master record?

Q: 6) Do you want to represent asset components using asset sub-numbers? If so, for what purposes do you plan to use asset sub-numbers? A: Q: 7) Are cost centers (business areas) to be defined in the asset master record on a timedependent basis? A: Q: 8) Do you see a business need to create multiple similar asset master records in one step? A: Q: A: Q: 10) In your enterprise, is there a requirement to shut down an asset (discontinue depreciation) for a period of time? A: Q: A: 194 MasterData.doc 11) How do you archive your asset master records at the present time? 9) Do you have assets that require increased depreciation due to multiple shift use?

ValueSAP -

Q: 12) How long do you intend to continue to manage assets, which are no longer on hand physically, in the system? A:

18.

Real Estate Management

Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to copy Customizing settings of one company code to another company code? A:

18.1.

Real Estate Objects

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How should the system map the plant maintenance object structure? (This is generally a hierarchy) Explanation: There is a Customizing setting to structure and update functional locations the same way as for Real Estate objects. A: Q: 3) Where do you intend to store key data? In the RE system or another system? If in another system, which system? Explanation: The main system for the master data could be a CAFM system. A: 1) What real estate object hierarchy do you want the system to map?

18.1.1.
Questions: Q:

Business Entity

1) How Many Business Entity Do You Want To Manage With The System?

Explanation: Enter the number of business entities per company code. A: Q: MasterData.doc 2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? 195

ValueSAP -

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 4) Should the numbers of the business entity be unique throughout all company codes? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 6) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 7) Is there an organizational assignment of the business entity to the business area, profit center and/or maintenance area? A: Q: 8) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: MasterData.doc 9) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects? 196

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 11) Who edits the objects and processes? 10) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 12) Which regional locations, location data, districts, transport connections and maintenance districts do you want to use for the business entities? A: Q: 13) Which Units Of Measurement Do You Want To Preassign To The Business Entity On A Company Code-Dependent Basis? A: Q: 14) Which tenancy laws do you want to use?

Explanation: Country-specific specifications for rental process Country-specific specifications for rental process The tenancy law controls o the service charge settlement o the rental adjustment o periods of notice o periods of notice A: Q: 15) If representative lists of rents are to be assigned to business entities, which ones will you use? A: Q: 16) Do you want to preassign the settlement variants (maintenance and heating expenses settlement) to the business entities and if yes, which ones? A: Q: A: Q: A: 197 MasterData.doc 18) Do you plan to link the object to projects? 17) If you intend to maintain data for option rates, how will these be calculated?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

19) Which partners have to be maintained for the object?

18.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Property

1) How Many Properties Do You Want To Manage With The System?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: A: 6) Do you want to assign one or more assets to the object (property/building)? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real 198 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: 9) What area types do you want to use? 8) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 10) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) Who edits the objects and processes? 12) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 11) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 14) Do You Want To Use Main Usage Types And If So, Which Ones? 199 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: If FI-AA is active and an asset is assigned, the main usage type is derived from the asset class and you can enter it manually. The main usage type is the account determination key. A: Q: 15) How Many Entries Do You Want To Use With Regard To Heritable Building Right, Usage Type Acc. To Area Or Development Plan? Explanation: Questions about building laws and regulations A: Q: 16) What Values Do You Want To Use For Property Types, Location Quality, Ground Type and Overall Condition? Explanation: Questions about quality and type of property A: Q: 17) Will Undeveloped Properties Also Be Rented (For Example, Parking Lots, Usage Rights And So On)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 19) Which partners have to be maintained for the object? 18) Do you plan to maintain land values for the property?

18.1.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Building

1) How Many Buildings Do You Want To Manage With The System?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: 200 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q:

3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: A: 6) Do you want to assign one or more assets to the object (property/building)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Q: A:

Q: 8) What Values Do You Want To Use For Building Type And Condition Of Building, Roof and Facade? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 11) What area types do you want to use? 10) Which object characteristics do you intend to use? 9) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics do you intend to maintain for the object?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 12) Which area types are area totals?

201 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: 16) Who edits the objects and processes? 15) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 13) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 17) Which Values Do You Want To Use For The Additional Data About Buildings (Parish, Floor, Heritable Building Right)? A: Q: 18) Do you have other values to maintain for insurances, or assessed values and deadlines for new development or modernizations etc.? A: 202 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

19) Do you plan to link the object to projects?

20) Which partners have to be maintained for the object?

18.1.4.
Questions: Q: A:

Rental Unit

1) Are your rental units for residential, commercial or mixed usage?

Q: 2) How many rental units do you want to manage in the system (number of rental units for apartments, state-funded apartments, commercial units)? A: Q: 3) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 6) What usage types do the rental units have? To which internal usage types do you want to assign these usage types? Explanation: Every external usage type has to be assigned to an internal usage type. The selection of internal usage types for a rental unit is predefined: (01 Privately financed accommodation; 02 Public authority supported accommodation, 03 Commercial tenancy law; 04 Commercial parking space; 05 Private parking space; 06 Rental unit mixed usage; 07 Advertising space; 08 Stand area; 09 General parking space) A: 203 MasterData.doc 4) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

ValueSAP -

Q:

7) Will you assign rental units directly to a business entity?

Explanation: You can only directly assign rental units to business entities in the internal usage types 04 and 05 (parking spaces). A: Q: A: Q: A: 9) Do you intend to use a cost center for posting vacancy costs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Q: 10) Which rental unit fields do you want to have as required, optional, display or hidden fields, depending on the usage type? Explanation: For the rental unit the field status is further differentiated by the usage type. A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 14) What rental unit location description data do you want to use? 204 13) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 11) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Location description data: Building part, floor, location in floor, lift up to floor A: Q: 15) Do you want to maintain a value for the account determination for the object (RU, RA, general contract)? Explanation: This value is the account determination key for the account determination. Use this account determination value to define an object- specific account determination. A: Q: 16) Do you want to use occupancy obligations for the rental unit? And if yes, which ones? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 21) Which apportionment units do you want to be able to define for these objects? 20) If you intend to maintain rooms for rental units, which room types will you use? 19) Which room types do you want to use? 18) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics do you intend to maintain for the object? 17) Do you want to have reasons for irregular rent increases? If yes, which ones?

Explanation: Apportionment units can be maintained for either the rental unit or the rental agreement (such as the number of aerial connections on a rental unit and the number of people on the rental agreement). A: Q: 22) Do you want to make a consumption-dependent service charge settlement (using meter readings)? Explanation: In this case you have to define which meters are to be created for which rental units and the number range. 205 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 24) What area types do you want to use? 23) Which vacancy reasons do you want to use?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 25) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: 26) Which area types are reference areas (divided into commercial, residential and mixed usage)? A: Q: A: Q: 28) Which area types should the user be able to enter (allowed)? Which should require an entry (required)? Which should be automatically superimposed when a rental unit is created? A: Q: 29) What is the selection of conditions you want for this object? 27) Which area types should you be able to edit (depending on external usage type)?

Explanation: You can have different conditions for each condition group (rental unit, rental agreement, management contract, general contract). A:

206 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 30) Do you intend to use different condition types for the basic rent (for instance office basic rent, store basic rent etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: 32) In which hierarchy level do you want a new condition category to be when you are adding new conditions to the selection? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions When you are adding new conditions in the maintenance dialog for rental units, rental agreements, management contracts and offers (respective condition groups), the figure entered here specifies the hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. When you activate the "Insert new condition types", the hierarchy level 0 displays all the conditions that have not yet been used. The additional condition types of level 1, level 2 and so on can be displayed by activating "Display +". displayed by activating "Display +". The figure 9 can be used to specify conditions that you do not want to be included in the selection available to the user. We recommend using the figure 9 when: using the figure 9 when: - Conditions still exist on the "old" contracts but will not be used in the new contracts - The condition type "cash deposit" has to be permissible for the rental agreement but cannot be entered in the condition screen (but in the "Rental collateral" dialog box) - Rent reductions are to be maintained in the dialog box "Rent reductions" and not directly in the rental agreement. A: Q: 33) Which conditions do you want to have as mandatory, hidden (when creating) and for which conditions is the zero value (preassignment field save) permissible? Explanation: Defects recording for the inspection lot. "Save Preassignment" Field: When, as is usually the case, the indicator is not set, condition items with values the same as in Customizing or for which no values (or, the zero value) have been entered are automatically deleted during saving. You can prevent this automatic deletion of condition items by setting the indicator "Save conditions identical with preassignment" for the corresponding condition type. corresponding condition type. We recommend a "zero condition" if no advance payments have been specified for the condition "Advance payment sales-based rent" or the conditions (even if they have a zero value) are the same as the sales agreements but you still want to save them. agreements but you still want to save them. A: Q: 34) Which condition categories are used (for instance basic rent, advance payments, flat rates, surcharges)? A: Q: 35) Which condition types are mutually exclusive, and which conditions of one category are possible for each object (rental unit, contract) (min./max./exactly one, unlimited)? 207 MasterData.doc 31) In which order should the condition types be displayed?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 36) Should the conditions of the lease-out be transferred to the rental unit at rental end? If so, what amount? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 40) Who edits the objects and processes? 39) Do you intend to rent rooms individually? 38) If you have garages to manage, are they always linked to another rental unit? 37) Should the conditions of the lease-out be used for the next lease-out at rental end?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 41) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: Q: A: 42) Which partners have to be maintained for the object?

18.1.5.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Rooms

1) Do you wand the system to map rooms? If yes, how many objects are involved?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. 208 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 4) What area types do you want to use? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 5) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Who edits the objects and processes? 7) Which object characteristics do you intend to use? 6) Which room types do you want to use?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 9) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A:

18.1.6.
Questions:

Land Register
209

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q:

1) Do you want the system to map land register information?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which land register types do you intend to use, which types of charges in Section III, and which charges and restrictions in Section II? A: Q: 5) Are there any further rights and restrictions that are not documented in the land register? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Who edits the objects and processes? 6) Should the system manage all your parcels of land? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

18.1.7.
Questions: Q:

Correction Items (Germany)

1) Do you want to map correction items in the system?

Explanation: German law: The correction item groups together the acquisition and manufacture costs of an asset as well as the deductible or non-deductible input taxes of these costs. Correction items for assets are grouped together in Asset Accounting. In the correction items, the input tax amounts are updated according to German tax regulations based on the option, composite or base rates. German tax regulations based on the option, composite or base rates. 210 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

18.1.8.
Questions:

Participation ID

Q: 1) How do you want to designate the length and name (part of the key) of the participation ID? Explanation: The designation of the participant ID is character string with 10 characters. A: Q: 2) Which groups do you want to map for the service charge settlement?

Explanation: Groups can be made for all business entities and participant groups. Rental units are grouped together to form one group that participates in the service charge settlement costs. These groups can defined on a time-dependent basis. A: Q: 3) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

18.1.9.
Questions:

Settlement Unit

Q: 1) How do you want to designate the name (part of the key) and the length of the settlement unit? Explanation: The name of the participant ID is a 10 digit character string. The settlement unit is 5 digits in length. A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Which service charge keys will you use? 2) Do you plan to use cross-business entity settlement units?

211 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) Should the system prevent the multiple assignment of rental units to settlement units with the same service charge key? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Do you want to allow more than one apportionment factor per settlement unit?

Q:

Explanation: For example, should the factor could be 40% area and 60% consumption. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) Which settlement variants will you use (for instance yearly, twice-yearly,...)?

Q: A:

Q: 7) Which apportionment units or distribution keys (areas per rental unit and so on) do you want to use? Explanation: If you want to use consumption-dependent apportionment factors for the service charge settlement, you need to have the corresponding meter for the rental unit. A: Q: 8) Do you plan to use heating days (monthly temperature reference no. used in Switzerland)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Who edits the objects and processes?

Q:

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

18.1.10.
Questions: Q:

Master Settlement Unit

1) Do you want to use master settlement units?

Explanation: Use master settlement units if you want to group together the different service charges incurred by one supplier on one invoice. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 212 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 3) Who edits the objects and processes? 2) Which settlement units will you assign to which master settlement units?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

18.1.11.
Questions: Q: A:

Heating System

1) With which external settlement company do you work?

Q: 2) If you intend to carry out external heating costs settlements, which heating systems will you create? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you plan to exchange service charge settlement data with external settlement companies using data medium exchange? A: 4) Which service charge keys will be settled by external companies? 3) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

18.2.

Partner
Business Partner Real Estate

18.2.1.
Questions: Q: A:

1) Do you plan to group business partners into business areas and applications?

Q: 2) If you intend to retain SAP's number range for business partners and addresses, will you use internal or external numbering? A: 213 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

3) Which forms of address do you intend to use?

4) Which letter form of address do you intend to use?

5) Which address ID do you intend to use?

Q: 6) Which legal forms do the organizations that you intend to manage in the system as partners have? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) If you intend to map potential rental applicants in the system, would you like to maintain levels of credit standing and institutes providing credit standing information? Which ones? A: Q: 14) Do you want to maintain memos for business partners? If yes, what type of memo? 12) If you intend to use partner-partner relationships, which types? 11) If you intend to use employee groups, which types? 10) Which employment status will you use for natural persons? 9) Which marital property regime will you use for natural persons? 8) Which marital status will you use for natural persons? 7) Which legal entity will you use for organizations?

Explanation: General, others or special memos as well as role-specific memos such as credit-standing, previous or present tenancy can be maintained. A: 214 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 15) Do you want to use business partner additional data? If yes, which data do you want to use? Explanation: You can maintain 11 tables with values. The tables are designated as group keys. group keys. Example: In 'Group key 1' you want to maintain values for 'special hobby' A: Q: A: Q: 17) If you intend to subdivide a role into different role types, which role will you divide into which role type? A: Q: 18) The "master tenant with customer account" business partner should take priority over the customer. Does that correspond with the processes and responsibility rules in your organization? A: Q: 19) Do you want to preassign values to fields when customers are automatically created? If yes, which fields? Explanation: Typical fields are: reconciliation account, payment conditions and key for payment grouping, dunning processes and dunning group keys. A: Q: 20) In which components do you want to assign partner roles? 16) Which partner roles will you need (for instance tenant, owner, manager, clerk)?

Explanation: Example: Tenant to rental agreement, janitor to building A: Q: 21) Which role-specific fields do you want to define as required, optional, display or hidden fields? A: Q: 22) When creating, changing or displaying business partner data, which fields do you want to have as required, optional, display or hidden fields? A: Q: 23) When creating a tenant or manager, should the system automatically copy the address of the object? 215 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

19.
19.1.

Personnel Administration
Bases
Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to assign your own employee numbers or have the system generate them for you? SAP recommends the use of system generated employee numbers after the initial data conversion. A: Q: 2) With the use of third-party archiving systems, SAP allows you to store documents (eg photographs, resumes, position description forms) for employee level. If you are using this facility, which documents will be stored? A: Q: 3) For which infotypes or reports should an audit trail be set up?

Explanation: It is possible to automatically record all changes made to infotypes (screens of related nformation) and when reports have been initiated via a log file.Typically, this facility is switched on to record changes to sensitive data for audit purposes. Sometimes this facility is also switched on for other infotypes to check for common errors in the post go-live period. the post go-live period. A: Q: 4) SAP allows you to maintain a free-text screen for all infotypes. Do you have the requirement to store free text? A:

19.2.

Employee's Personal Details

Personal Data

19.2.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) When you record employee names, which forms-of-address, titles, name prefixes/affixes (eg BSc, Sir) do you use and how do you want them displayed on reports and correspondance? A: Q: 2) When recording employee details, which other particulars (eg marital status, nationality) do you wish to record? 216 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A:

19.2.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Challenge

1) Do you record challenges (physical, mental) for your employees? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If you are required to record the type of challenge, which types do you track?

Q: A:

19.2.3.
Questions:

Addresses

Q: 1) What address types would you like to maintain for your employees (eg permanent, postal)? A:

19.2.4.
Questions: Q:

Bank Details

1) Which methods of payment are allowed in your organization?

Explanation: It is necessary to define a method of payment (eg direct payment, cheque) for each employee being paid. The method of payment can be defined globally for all employees or a different method for each country. If the direct payment option is to be used, consider uploading the banks from disk. the banks from disk. A:

19.2.5.
Questions:

Family/Related Persons

Q: 1) What relationships with other persons do you wish to maintain for your employees (eg spouse, child, guardian, emergency contact, friend)? A: Q: A: 2) Are relations included in the calculation of private health insurance?

19.2.6.
Questions:

Education and Training

217 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Define the types of educational establishments (eg secondary school, university, internal course) for which you want to record your employees' certificates. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Identify which branches of study (eg subjects, course name) are to be recorded against employees. A: 2) List the types of certificates which you would want to attach to employees.

19.2.7.
Questions:

Other/Previous Employers

Q: 1) If you wish to record previous employment history for your new employees, list which Industry and Jobs you require. A:

19.2.8.
Questions:

Qualifications

Q: 1) If you are not using the qualifications catalogue within Personnel Development (PD), list the qualifications (eg languages, skills) you would like to record for employees. A:

19.2.9.
Questions:

Appraisals

Q: 1) In SAP you have the ability to record appraisals in either PA or PD. If you intend to record appraisal ratings in PA, which types of performance criteria (eg Leadership, Communication) and weightings do you require? A:

19.2.10.
Questions:

Membership Fees

Q: 1) List the entities against which employees may pay membership (eg health club, union dues, professional organizations). A: Q: A: 218 MasterData.doc 2) List the payee organizations for these membership fees.

ValueSAP -

Q:

3) In your company, how are membership fees calculated?

Explanation: You can, for example, calculate the union dues as a percentage of a predetermined assessment base. This procedure takes minimum and maximum limits into account. Alternatively, you can determine a fixed amount. A:

19.2.11.
Questions: Q:

Communications Data

1) Which user identification numbers are to be recorded against your employees?

Explanation: You may record user identification numbers for various electronic media (eg internet, fax) or company credit card numbers against each of your employees. employees. A:

19.2.12.
Questions:

Stat.of Res.Perm. CH

Q: 1) Do you plan to register and manage information regarding the statuses of your foreign employees' residence permits? A: Q: A: 2) If yes, which types of residence permits do your employees hold?

19.2.13. Registration of country of birth (act stim.lab.part.ethn.minorities) NL

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Which employee categories do you wish to discern (education and job grade)? 1) Does your organization send this (statutory) statement to the Chamber of Commerce?

19.2.14.
Questions:

Additional Personal Data CA, SG, US

Q: 1) SAP has the facility to record both ethnicity, Vietnam-related military service and military reserve status. Does your company record any of this information and if applicable, what ethnic groups are required? A: 219 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

19.3.

Information About Work Relationship

Organizational Assignment

19.3.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to group your employees for security or reporting purposes according to who administers their personnel records, payroll data or time data? If so, provide a list of Administrators for personnel records, for payroll data and for time data. A: Q: 2) Do you want to use a service type catalog?

Explanation: The service type is an activity-based classification of employees. For example, this is defined for hospitals in the Accounting Regulations for Hospitals (Krankenhausbuchfhrungsverordnung). In addition to activity-based account determination, the service type can be used for statistical purposes. can be used for statistical purposes. can be used for statistical purposes. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Which service type catalog do you use?

Q: A:

Q: 4) You should answer the following questions if your accounting system uses Funds Management. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Would you like to work with commitments for personnel expenditure?

Q:

Explanation: Commitments are budget assignments that are created before the actual postings. Commitments are used to reserve funds for future expenditure. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.3.2.
Questions:

Planned Working Time

Q: 1) This infotype is used to store the planned working time (work schedule rules). See Time Management questionnaire. A:

19.3.3.
Questions:

Contract Elements
220

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) What types of employee contracts are used in your organization?

Q: 2) If you wish to record periods of notice which must be given by either the employee or employer, list the standard notice periods. A: Q: 3) If you wish to record the start date of service worked in affiliated or acquired companies, list the allowable standard corporations. A: Q: 4) Do you have employees who receive continued pay in case of illness in accordance with the standard rules valid until June 30, 1994? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Cules son los tipos de contrato laboral que se emplean en su organizacin?

Q: A:

Q: 6) En qu momento se realiza la impresion del contrato? Se quiere imprimir el contrato desde dentro del sistema? A: Q: A: Q: 8) Existen periodos de prueba para los empleados recien incorporados a la empresa? Describir duracin del periodo y proceso. A: Q: A: 9) Se realizan contratos a tiempo parcial? Describir los casos. 7) Se incluyen clausulas adicionales y variables entre contratos al texto?

19.3.4.
Questions:

Internal Medical Service

Q: 1) What medical examinations (eg audiometric, general habits, vision) would you like to record for your employees? A: 221 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 2) For each medical examination, list the specific tests or areas for which you want to record medical data. A: Q: 3) For each specific test or area, detail the typical results (eg Y/N, x cm, blood type) you might want to record. A: Q: 4) For each occurrence of a medical examination, what overall results (eg fit for work) would you like to record? A:

19.3.5.
Questions:

Monitoring of Dates

Q: 1) SAP allows you to monitor and to report on the expiration of certain key events (eg probation, work permit, medical examination). Which key events do you wish to record? A:

19.3.6.
Questions:

Powers of Attorney

Q: 1) List the different types of powers of attorney (or similar instruments) which can be recorded against your employees. A:

19.3.7.
Questions: Q:

Date Specifications

1) What key dates do you want to record against your employees?

Explanation: What are the key dates you want to record against employees that are used for evaluations? Some of these dates may differ to another similar date recorded elsewhere in the system (eg a hire date for purposes of leave accruals, hire date for service anniversary). A: Q: 2) Do you have additional, payroll-relevant key dates that differ from the actual entry date? Explanation: Differing key dates occur when a time before employment in the current company is taken into account. Typical examples include: Typical examples include: -Key date for severance pay -Key date for leave -Continued remuneration -Continued remuneration 222 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A:

19.3.8.
Questions:

Employment Periods - Public Sector

Q: 1) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Dienstzeiten bereit, die Sie bei der Ermittlung der ruhegehaltfhigen Dienstzeiten bercksichtigen mssen. A: Q: A: 2) Stellen Sie die Bescheinigung zur Festsetzung des Ruhegehaltssatzes zur Verfgung.

19.3.9.
Questions:

Internal Data

Q: 1) This infotype records internal data on each employee (eg previous personnel number, work center information). Which of these elements will your company record? A:

19.3.10.
Questions:

Statistics

Q: 1) SAP gives you the ability to store and evaluate user-defined statistics (eg size of safety equipment). What statistics do you need to maintain for your employees? A:

19.3.11.
Questions: Q: A:

German Civil Service Statistics

1) Which of these statistics do you use?

19.3.12.
Questions:

Corporate Function

Q: 1) List the different organizational roles (do not confuse with positions and jobs) which can be assigned to your employees. Explanation: These roles are typically cross-functional and not necessarily related to a person#s primary position (eg first aid officer, sexual haressment officer). A:

19.3.13.
Questions:

Company Instructions

223 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) List the standard instructions or other activities (eg high voltage switching, orientation, recognition award) which you might want to record against an employee. A:

19.3.14.
Questions:

Objects on Loan

Q: 1) Do you wish to record the loan of company property (eg PCs, mobile telephones) and an identifying number against employees? If so, list these items. A:

19.3.15.
Questions:

Grievances CA, US

Q: 1) If you track grievances, disciplinary actions or harassment incidents on employees, provide a list of each type and a detailed description of the business process. A:

19.3.16.
Questions:

Residence Status CA, US

Q: 1) This infotype is used to maintain Residence Status information and information needed to track I-9 data. List any identification documents your company needs to track. A:

19.3.17.
Questions: Q:

External Agencies NL

1) With which UVI or UVIs are you registered?

Explanation: NOTE: The 'employment status' and 'shift type' can be reported on from the infotype or from the report parameters. NOTE: The various CBS wage elements must be linked to the SAP wage type catalogue. A:

19.3.18.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

CBS NL

1) Does your organization submit this statement?

2) With which frequency do you submit statements?

224 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

19.4.

Payroll Specifications
Basic Pay

19.4.1.
Questions: Q:

1) Describe your pay structure.

Explanation: The company's pay structure can be defined in either Compensation or Personnel Administration. A pay structure is comprised of a Type (eg industrial agreement), Area (eg region), Group (eg grade) and Level (scale). This can be achived in a variety of ways (eg industry, agreement, region). agreement, region). A: Q: 2) Provide details of any groups of employees for whom automatic assignment to pay scale structure is appropriate? Explanation: It is possible to automatically update an employee's pay scale group or level for a set period depending on your business rules (ie age and time-related increases). timerelated increases). A: Q: 3) Will your company perform global salary increases and, if so, provide the details?

Explanation: You can also make global salary increases for specific groups of employees based on different methods (eg a set amount, a percentage). This can be achived in either Compensation or Personnel Administration. Note: If a global salary increase is required shortly after your go-live date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task. go-live date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task. A: Q: 4) In your company, how is extra payment for overtime beyond that specified by the collective agreement represented? Explanation: You can deposit the overtime payment in a separate wage type. This prohibits changes in the collective agreement from having an effect on overtime payments. A: Q: 5) How are lump-sum payments for overtime represented in your company?

Explanation: You can register an agreement that includes overtime or a separate part of the salary with either a fixed number of hours or a fixed amount that covers all hours. A: Q: MasterData.doc 6) Do you use a case group catalog to define the payments? If so, give details here. 225

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Definir los convenios colectivos a los que estn adscritos los empleados de la empresa. A: Q: 8) Definir las distintas categorias y subcategorias profesionales establecidas en convenio. A: Q: 9) Listar los conceptos de nmina que dependen de las categorias profesionales establecidas en convenio. A: Q: 10) Existen nivelaciones automticas por convenio (por ejemplo saltos de categoria en funcin de la antigedad)? A: Q: 11) Defina en qu bases de valoracin de deben incluir las cc-nminas del infotipo Emolumentos Bsicos. A: Q: A: Q: 13) Defina cules son los haberes que se acumulan para el pago del plus por zona desfavorable. A: Q: A: 14) Cules son los tipos de contrato que existen en la empresa? 12) Indique cules son las cc-nminas que componen el sueldo fijo.

19.4.2.
Questions: Q:

Family-Related Bonuses - PSG

1) Sollen die Ortszuschlagsbestandteile maschinell ermittelt werden ?

Explanation: Family-related bonuses include different child and spousal elements. Familyrelated bonuses include different child and spousal elements. 226 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do you also require the child increase amount for the special bonus? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Wollen Sie im Versorgungsfall die Kinderbestandteile dem Berechtigten zuweisen? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: A:

19.4.3.
Questions: Q: A:

External Transfers

1) Does your organization provide savings schemes? If so, which ones?

Q: 2) SAP has Infotypes for making specific payments to third parties on behalf of employees (eg Loans, Garnishments, Membership Fees). Which additional payments to third parties do you require? A:

19.4.4.
Questions:

Tax

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of: special employee groups (e.g. artists?) conversion rules green table and/or holiday A: Q: 2) Group together your personnel areas/subareas to employment tax permanent establishments. Explanation: Die lohnsteuerliche Betriebssttte ist der Personalbereich/-teilbereich, der als Absender fr die Lohnsteueranmeldung verwendet wird - als Arbeitgeber auf der Lohnsteuerbescheinigung steht - das Kirchensteuergebiet bestimmt. A: Q: 3) Create a list of Tax Offices for your permanent establishments. -

Explanation: The address and tax number are required. A:

227 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) Which tax procedure do you want to use to tax regular payments?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Besteuerung nach Monatstabelle - Besteuerung mit Permanenz - Besteuerung mit Permanenz A: Q: A: Q: 6) Which flat-rate taxation options do you want to use? 5) After which payroll period do you want to create employment tax statements?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Mglichkeiten: - Regelungen fr Aushilfen nach 40a EStG (kurzfristig Beschftigte und geringfgig Entlohnte) - Regelungen fr beschrnkt Steuerpflichtige nach 50a EStG - Regelungen fr einzelne Bezge nach 40 und 40b EStG (z.B. Essensgeld, Fahrgeld, Zukunftssicherungsleistungen) A: Q: 7) What procedure do you want to use for collecting flat-rate church tax?

Explanation: Die pauschale Kirchensteuer kann entweder - fr alle Mitarbeiter mit einem ermigten Hebesatz oder - nur fr die kirchensteuerpflichtigen Mitarbeiter mit dem normalen Satz erhoben werden. A: Q: 8) Which special tax procedures do you want to use?

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Verfahren: - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Doppelbesteuerungsabkommen - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Auslandsttigkeitserlassen - Steuerbefreiung aufgrund von Grenzgngerregelungen - Arbeitskammern Bremen/Saarland - Arbeitskammern Bremen/Saarland A: Q: A: Q: 10) Se contemplan pagos en especie a los empleados? Describir cules son y su proceso. A: Q: 11) En el caso de realizar pagos en especie se realizan ingresos a cuenta no repercutidos? A: 228 MasterData.doc 9) Which employment tax tables are used?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

12) Se realizan pagos variables a los empleados?

19.4.5.
Questions:

Social Insurance

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the employee insurance statement? If so, which one? A: Q: 2) Does your organization provide a private health insurance scheme? If so, please specify. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Does your organization provide additional SI schemes (e.g. ANW gap, early retirement, etc.)? If so, which ones? A: Q: 7) Create a list of all the state health insurance funds used in your enterprise. 5) How many different contribution percentages are applicable to each SI scheme? 4) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI days? 3) Which calculation method is applicable to the SI schemes?

Explanation: Achten Sie auf folgende Kriterien: - Bezeichnung der Krankenkasse und deren Geschftsstellen - Anschriften und Bankangaben bei den Geschftsstellen - Betriebsnummer und Rechtskreis (Ost/West) Beachten Sie, da berregionale Krankenkassen zweimal angelegt werden mssen, wenn Sie Betriebe in verschiedenen Rechtskreisen haben. Anhand des Rechtskreises der Krankenkasse wird in der Abrechnung die entsprechende Beitragsbemessungsgrenze fr KV und PV verwendet. - Prozentstze und Beitragsklassen Prozentstze und Beitragsklassen A: Q: 8) Do you pay contributions to private HI funds or industry-related pension organizations? 229 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Falls nein, d.h. alle Privatversicherten sind Selbstzahler, gengt es, eine Privatkasse fr alle anzulegen, da dann keine Anschriften und Bankangaben notwendig sind. Ansonsten stellen Sie die Informationen analog zu den gesetzlichen Krankenkassen bereit. Krankenkassen bereit. A: Q: 9) Which bonus calculation procedure do you use for employees voluntarily insured in a statutory health insurance fund? Explanation: Wenn die gesetzliche Krankenkasse den Beitrag fr freiwillig Versicherte anhand von Beitragsklassen erhebt, haben Sie eine Wahlmglichkeit bei der Berechnung des Zuschusses. Sie mssen als Zuschu mindestens die Hlfte des Betrags zahlen, welcher sich aus dem Prozentsatz multipliziert mit der Beitragsbemessungsgrenze ergibt. Sie knnen, ohne da ein geldwerter Vorteil entsteht, auch die Hlfte des Beitrags zahlen, der sich aus der Beitragsklasse ergibt. A: Q: 10) Are there company areas in your enterprise for which contributions have to be paid?

Explanation: Erstellen Sie eine Liste der Betriebsteile und den zugeordneten Umlagekassen mit den Prozentstzen fr Umlage 1 und Umlage 2. A: Q: 11) Do you make use of the option of sending contribution statements to a federal association instead of individual HI funds? Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der Bundesverbnde mit ihren Anschriften, Bankangaben und Betriebsnummern. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) Do you plan to send your contribution statements via EDI?

Q:

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DF-fhigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DF-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen hinterlegt werden. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 13) Put together a list of the personnel areas/subareas, that could be senders of statements of contributions paid Explanation: Ordnen Sie alle Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche diesen Absendern zu. 230 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 14) Create a list of all combinations of senders and receiving offices for the contribution statements. Explanation: Absender sind die absendenden Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche, Annahmestellen sind entweder die Krankenkassen, Bundesverbnde oder DF-Kassen. Fr jede Kombination wird die Kontonummer bzw. die Zahlstellennummer bentigt. Vermerken Sie in der Liste, welche Krankenkassen auf Bundesverbnde bzw. DF-Kassen umgelenkt werden sollen. A: Q: 15) Give an overview of the social security constellations legal in your enterprise.

Explanation: Beispiele hierfr sind: - Arbeiter - Angestellte - Pflicht/Freiwillig/Privatversicherte - Geringverdiener - Geringfgig Beschftigte - Kurzfristig Beschftigte - Auszubildende Praktikanten - Mitarbeiter, welche ein freiwilliges soziales Jahr leisten - Altersteilzeitler Rentner - Versorgungsempfnger - Beamte A: Q: A: Q: A: 17) En qu grupos de cotizacin se agrupan los empleados? 16) Listar los epgrafes a los que estn adscritos los empleados.

19.4.6.
Questions: Q: A:

Loans

1) In which way are unscheduled repayments dealt with?

Q: 2) Does your organization provide (interest-bearing/interest-free) loans? If so, which ones? please specify the (repayment) conditions. A: Q: 3) Which types of loans do you offer your employees?

Explanation: You can differ between annuity repayment or repayment in installments. A:

231 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 19.4.7.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you want to calculate garnishments automatically or transfer them manually? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Recipients to Recipient Keys? 1) Does your organization make use of garnishment of wages? If so, please specify.

Garnishment

Q:

Explanation: Die Pfndung ermglicht es, bestimmte Empfnger, die hufig als Glubiger auftreten, im System unter einem Schlssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhuser, Banken). Die Bankverbindung dieser Empfnger kann dann zentral administriert werden. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Do You Want to Group Together Some of Your Creditors to Creditor Keys?

Q:

Explanation: Die Pfndung ermglicht es, bestimmte Glubiger im System unter einem Schlssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhuser, Banken). Die Anschriften dieser Glubiger knnen dann zentral administriert werden. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Do you charge your employees for garnishment processing?

Q:

Explanation: Sie knnen auch unterschiedliche Berechnungsregeln (abhngig z.B. vom zugehrigen Personalbereich) im System definieren. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.8.
Questions: Q: A:

Pension

1) Does your organization provide (company) pension schemes? If so, which ones?

19.4.9.
Questions: Q: MasterData.doc

Family Allowance AT

1) Do your employees receive family allowances? 232

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.10.
Questions: Q: A:

One Time Pay. Off-Cy. CA, US

1) List all one time payments for employees (eg bonuses).

19.4.11.
Questions: Q: A:

Payroll Outsourcing CA, US

1) Does your company outsource payroll processing? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If so, to what extent (eg tax processing, check printing)

Q: A:

19.4.12.
Questions:

Deduction Limits CA, US

Q: 1) List all deductions that have a maximum amount to be taken (eg united way, 401K loans). A:

19.4.13.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Capital Formation (Germany)

1) Create a list of ER bonuses granted in your enterprise for capital formation.

2) What special features exist when calculating ER bonuses for capital formation?

Explanation: Mgliche Besonderheiten: - Anteilige Berechnung nach dem Beschftigungsgrad des Mitarbeiters - Krzung durch Abwesenheiten - Bercksichtigung der Betriebszugehrigkeit - Bercksichtigung von Einkommensgrenzen - Bercksichtigung von Einkommensgrenzen A: Q: 3) Create a list of the recipients of your employee's capital formation agreements.

233 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Necessary payee data: - Name and address of payee - Country of bank Sort code - Bank account number A:

19.4.14.
Questions:

DUEVO (Germany)

Q: 1) Create a list of personnel areas/subareas, which could be senders of DEUEV notifications Explanation: Ordnen Sie Personalbereiche/-teilbereiche den Absendern zu. A: Q: 2) Specify a receiving office and forwarding office for each of the health fund types you use. Explanation: Payee funds are stored in the system as special health insurance funds. A: Q: 3) Do you intend transferring DEUEV notifications by EDI?

Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DF-fhigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DF-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen hinterlegt werden. Fr die Kommunikation mit den DF-fhigen Annahmestellen wird eine Zusatzsoftware (KKS - Krankenkassenkommunikationssystem) bentigt. A: Q: 4) Do you want to start using SAP Payroll mid-year?

Explanation: SAP empfiehlt den Produktivstart im Januar. Wenn Sie unterjhrig starten wollen mssen Sie fr Ihre Mitarbeiter eine Abmeldung (vom Altsystem) und eine Anmeldung (im SAP-System) vornehmen. A: Q: 5) Choose a procedure for the DEUEV start.

Explanation: Es stehen zwei Verfahren zur Verfgung: a) bernahme der Abwesenheitsdaten der Mitarbeiter fr die letzten beiden Monate vor Produktivstart aus dem Altsystem. b) Kennzeichnen der Mitarbeiter, fr die das Altsystem eine DEV-Abmeldung oder -Unterbrechungsmeldung erstellt hat. A:

234 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 19.4.15.
Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you want to use to transfer the company insurance premium?

Company Insurance (Germany)

Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen: - Sammelberweisung (manuell ber Lohnartennnachweis) - Einzelberweisungen (durch Angabe der Empfngerdaten) A: Q: 2) Create a list of company insurance recipients.

Explanation: Required data are: - Name and address of payee - Bank details (country, sort code and account number) - Bank details (country, sort code and account number) A:

19.4.16.
Questions: Q:

CF/SPI Data DE Public Sector

1) With which supplementary pension funds are you a member?

Explanation: Provide a list with the following information: - Name and address of supplementary pension fund (SPF) - Bank details for SPF - Membership number Contribution rates - Registration number - Format for insurance number - Contribution assessment thresholds - Contribution assessment thresholds A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is flat-rate taxation of contributions permitted? If so, to what amount? Do you use the average method? Do you use annual or monthly taxation? A: Q: 4) Is the bonus subject to contributions? Is the bonus reduced with the contribution months? Explanation: Ist nur fr einen Teil der Monate des Jahres Umlage gezahlt worden, ist die Zuwendung ggf. nur fr diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen. fr diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen. A: Q: 5) Is an increased assessment threshold used in the bonus month? 235 MasterData.doc 2) Which pay elements are subject to contributions?

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 6) Ist im Fall von Wehrdienst oder Krankengeldzuschuzeiten ein fiktives Urlaubsbrutto als zu verbeitragendes Entgelt anzusetzen? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) If this case occurs during a month, are the actual gross elements still taken into account? Explanation: In this special case, the fictitious gross amount is used as the basis for the contribution calculation for the whole payroll period. The real gross payments due for the paid partial period are not taken into account in the contribution calculation. into account in the contribution calculation. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you use the notification procedure for the DATUEV-ZVE? [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Which insurance types occur in your enterprise?

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q: 10) Stellen Sie die Datensatzbeschreibung der von Ihnen erstellten ZVK-Meldungen zur Verfgung. Welche Felder sind zu fllen? A: Q: A: 11) Name the key day for the difference notifications.

19.4.17.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Official Housing DE Publuc Sector

1) Provide the table for the calculation of the maximum official housing remuneration.

2) Which pay elements are included in the official housing gross amount?

236 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Which family-related bonus elements are included in the official housing gross amount? A: Q: 4) Prepare a list of official houses.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Name - Address - Local rental value Taxable rental value - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs A:

19.4.18.
Questions: Q:

Personnel Accommodation DE Public Sector

1) Prepare a list of staff accommodations.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Description - Address - Value class Area - Number of persons - If applicable, percentage deduction due to deficits - Washing machine available (not coin operating) - Washing machine available (not coin operating) A: Q: A: 2) Welche Mitarbeiterkreise unterliegen der 15%-Regel?

19.4.19.
Questions:

Non-Monetary Remuneration - PSG

Q: 1) Which are the non-monetary remuneration values, for example, meals, accommodations? A:

19.4.20.
Questions:

Benefits Payment DE Public Sector

Q: 1) Werden Sie den Ruhegehaltssatz (Auswertung ruhegehaltfhiger Dienstzeiten) mit dem R/3- System festsetzen? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Will you calculate the pension payments using the SAP System? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Provide a list of pensionable pay elements. 237 MasterData.doc

Q: A:

Q:

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Nehmen Sie an dem Datentrgeraustauschverfahren des Postrentendienstes teil? 5) Which method do you use for the pension adjustment? 4) Welche Arten von Anrechnungen/Ruhensregelungen finden Anwendung?

Explanation: If yes, provide a list of the payroll numbers you require. If yes, provide a list of the payroll numbers you require. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) Are the pension payments you pay reimbursed by a third party?

Q:

Explanation: If yes, provide a list. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.21.
Questions: Q: A:

Sideline Job DE Public Sector

1) Provide a list of sideline jobs.

19.4.22.
Questions: Q: A:

Previous Employment Periods DE Public Sector

1) Nutzen Sie fr Hhergruppierungen den Bewhrungs-/Fallgruppenaufstieg? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Sind im Zusammenhang mit dem Bewhrungsaufstieg Vordienstzeiten zu bercksichtigen? A:

19.4.23.
Questions: Q: MasterData.doc

Rehabilitants DE Public Sector

1) Welche Art von Rehabilitanden haben Sie (Paragraphen SGB)? 238

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) Welche Rehabilitationsmamahmen gibt es, welche SV-Bestandteile werden abgefhrt und welche werden vom Arbeitsamt erstattet? A: Q: 3) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Arbeitsmter bereit.

Explanation: The following information is required: - Employment office number - Address Address A: Q: A: Q: 5) Wie werden diese Betrge gebucht? 4) Nennen Sie die Bankverbindung fr die Erstattung.

Explanation: This is taxable depending on the employment office. This is taxable depending on the employment office. A:

19.4.24.
Questions: Q:

Semiretirement DE

1) Do you have semi-retired employees with different models? Describe these models.

Explanation: Denken Sie an folgende Aspekte: - Prozentstze fr Nettoaufstockung Prozentstze fr RV-Aufstockung - verblockte/unverblockte Arbeitsphasen Lohnartenabhngigkeit, unterschiedliche Bercksichtigung je Modell Lohnartenabhngigkeit, unterschiedliche Bercksichtigung je Modell A:

19.4.25.
Questions:

Additional Income ES

Q: 1) Se comtemplan pagos fuera de la nmina que deben quedar reflejados en el informe 190 sobre retenciones. Describa en qu casos. A: Q: 2) Realiza pagos dinerarios o en especie por actividades profesionales prestadas por terceros? Describa estos casos. Describa en qu casos y las claves de percepcin a emplear. 239 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

19.4.26.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

SI Basic Data JP

1) List the name of Branch Offices for Social Insurance and Labor Insurance.

2) Assign a social/labor insurance branch office to each personnel subarea.

3) Define which types of social/labor insurance each employee subgroup needs.

Q: 4) Define social insurance premium rates for each branch office for social/labor insurance. A: Q: 5) Assign the amount and grade of monthly standard compesation to each employee group/sub group combination. A: Q: A: 6) Does your company have employee's pension fund? [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.27.
Questions: Q: A:

Residence Tax JP

1) Define employee subgroups liable for residence tax deduction.

Q: 2) Does your company have an office in an ordinance-designated city which determines the local goverment office to pay the residence tax by the location of the collecter's office? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.28.
Questions:

Life/Casualty Insurance JP

240 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) If your company has life/casualty insurance plan, define the names of the insurance institusions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus payment. A: Q: A: 2) Do you use LINC service? [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.29.
Questions:

Property Accumulation Savings JP

Q: 1) If your company has property accumulation savings plan, define the names of the insurance institutions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus payment. A:

19.4.30.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Union JP

1) Does your company have labor unions? If so, provide numbers and names.

2) Define the types of labor union members.

Q: 3) For each labor union, provide union membership fee calculation pattern for both monthly and bonus payment. Explanation: - How do you deduct the union memberhip fee? For example, deduction with fixed rate from basic monthly payment; a given amount per employee; fixed amount as a union membership fee. employee; fixed amount as a union membership fee. A:

19.4.31.
Questions:

Commuting Allowance Info. JP

Q: 1) Provide information about the commuting types, the date or month of payment, frequency, the actual goods supplied or not. A:

19.4.32.
Questions:

Overseas Pay JP

241 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Are there overseas assigned employees? If so, provide the payroll method and pattern for them. A:

19.4.33.
Questions: Q: A:

Social Ins. Funds NL

1) Does your organization provide any social fund schemes? If so, please specify.

19.4.34.
Questions:

Commuting NL

Q: 1) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your organization determine the number of kilometers? Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or depending on address NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or depending on address A: Q: 2) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your organization determine the number of days per week? Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time A: Q: 3) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, for which types of transportation? A:

19.4.35.
Questions:

Premium Reduction NL

Q: 1) Does your organization make use of Premium Reductions (tax and social insurance payments reductions law)? If so, which ones? A:

19.4.36.
Questions: Q: A: MasterData.doc

Special Regulations NL

1) Does your organization make use of the - Canada regulation? [ ]Yes 242

ValueSAP [ ]No Q: A: 2) Does your organization make use of - Delayed payment of wages? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Does your organization make use of - Pension severance? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

19.4.37.
Questions: Q:

Child care NL

1) Does your organization provide childcare? If so, please specify.

Explanation: NOTE: Take type of childcare into consideration, who provides care and does the employee pay a contribution does the employee pay a contribution does the employee pay a contribution A:

19.4.38.
Questions: Q: A:

Unemployment State US

1) List all states that you withhold Unemployment Insurance for.

19.4.39.
Questions: Q: A:

W-4 Withholding Info. US

1) List all entities that you withhold state tax for.

19.4.40.
Questions: Q: A:

Withholding Overrides US

1) Do you allow employees to override the standard withholding calculations for taxes? [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.41.
Questions: Q:

IRS Mandates US

1) Do you have any IRS Mandates on your employees? 243

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

19.4.42.
Questions: Q: A:

Tip Indicators US

1) Do any of your employees receive tips as part of compensation? [ ]Yes [ ]No

20.
20.1.

Personnel Development
Qualifications / Requirements
Questions: Q: 1) Do you have skills, competencies, qualifications, or requirements in your company? If you do, you need a qualifications catalog containing a hierachical structure of the qualifications of interest to your specific company. A: Q: 2) How do you evaluate these qualifications/requirements? Maintain the appropriate scales (e.g. a language scale with the proficiencies 1 through 5). A: Q: 3) Are there any alternative qualifications? (e.g. knowledge of AmiPro as an alternative to knowledge of Word). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you perform profile matchups between requirements profiles and qualification profiles? A: Q: 7) If qualification deficits are detected, do you want the system to propose training measures to rectify the situation? A: 244 5) For which jobs/positions should requirements be maintained? 4) For which employees should qualifications be maintained?

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 8) Do you try to find employees with specific qualifications, or employees suitable for specific jobs/positions? A: Q: A: 9) Do you want to find qualified applicants for vacant positions?

21.
Q: A:

Compensation Management
Questions: 1) Do you have geographical, regional or organizational differences in your pay policy?

Q: 2) For which period do you typically plan your compensation? From which period do you select your data? A: Q: 3) Do you use different ways to define your compensation manager than those defined in the standard R/3 system? A: Q: 4) Which evaluation path do you use to determine which persons in the organizational unit are to be included in the compensation administration process? A: Q: 5) Which plan version is used as the default plan version in Compensation Management? A: Q: 6) Which job evaluation method is most commonly used within your company and should be used as a default? A: Q: 7) Which salary survey method is most commonly used within your company and should be used as a default? A: 245 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

8) Which date is used as the key date for the calculation of the annualized base salary?

Q: 9) Which period do you consider to calculate an employees incentive pay for salary survey reporting purposes? A:

21.1.

Salary Packages

Questions: Q: A: 1) How many shares are available under a long-term incentive plan?

21.2.

Guidelines

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you determine the distribution of compensation adjustments or long-term incentives? A: Q: 4) Do you use alternative guideline criteria that are not supported by the SAP standard system (age, length of service, compa ratio, performance results) A: Q: 5) What criteria do you use for multidimensional calculation guidelines and how do you segment them? A: 2) Which employee criteria do you use to dertermine a guideline group? 1) Do you use different guidelines for different groups of employees?

21.3.

Eligibility Rules

Questions: Q: 1) Do you use different eligibility rules for different groups of employees? 246 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A:

21.4.

Adjustments

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you split your compensation adjustments into more than one wage type? Example: Do you breakdown your merit increase into two wage types such as inflation adjustment and salary increase? A: Q: 5) Which adjustment types do you use in your company (e.g. merit increase, bonus)? To which compensation components do they belong (fixed or variable)? A: Q: 6) Do you have a formal process to distribute your compensation adjustments (e.g.annual compensation review)? A: 3) Which compensation wage type do you use for a compensation adjustment? 2) Which wage types are the basis for compensation adjustments? 1) Which wage types do you want to use to update an employees pay information?

21.5.

Long-Term Incentives

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which company or employee events may influence the life cycle of a long-term icentive? A: 247 MasterData.doc 2) Which methods of payment does your company allow for long-term incentives? 1) Which events can have an impact on the number of shares available, price, ...?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

4) Which rules do you have regarding the availablility of long-term incentives?

5) Which awards do you offer to your employees?

6) Which eligibility rule defines the granting of a long-term incentive?

7) Which wage type do you want to use for a long-term incentive?

8) Which guidelines defines the distribution of a long-term incentive?

9) Which and how can a certain life event influence the vesting of a long-term incentive?

10) Determine the value of a long-term incentive

22.

Benefits
Questions: Q: 1) Will you administer benefits for two or more groups completely separately because of differences such as the country, the participants are located in, or the currency used for benefit calculations? Explanation: Benefit areas are used to group employees by benefits offered, countries and currencies. Most companies only use one benefit area unless they are administering benefits in multiple countries or currencies. A: Q: 2) Give a short description of each of your organization's benefit plans.

Explanation: What kind of benefit is provided by the plan? Who is going to pay for it? What happens with the payments? Are dependents or beneficiaries allowed? Are there different options for a single plan? Which group of employees is eligible for the plan? Does a third 248 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP party administrator calculate seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans? seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans? A: Q: 3) Define the set of plan types you need and assign the plans to the types.

Explanation: Each benefit plan has to be assigned to a plan type, which itself belongs to one of the categories health plans, insurance plans, savings plans, flexible spending accounts, credit plans, miscellaneous plans, stock purchase plans. An employee can only have one plan per plan type at a time. at a time. A: Q: 4) Do you have grandfathered plans or inactive historical plans?

Explanation: If yes: You can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked". If yes: You can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked". A: Q: 5) Who are the potential beneficiaries and dependents for your plans? Are there any other criteria that define the eligibility of related persons? A: Q: A: Q: 7) For each plan, state the plan number (typically group policy or contract number), plan status (open, locked, closed), and the benefit provider (vendor or carrier). A: 6) List your benefit providers.

22.1.

Plans
Health plans

22.1.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) What dependent coverage levels are available to your employees (for example, employee only, employee + 1, employee + family)? A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 3) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose. 249 2) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax.

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 4) For each option and dependent coverage, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. Explanation: For each of the plans from the health, insurance, and miscellaneous categories defined, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, length of service, any customer defined criteria. A: Q: 5) For each option and dependent coverage, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits. A: Q: 6) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any health plan? If so, when is it required? A:

22.1.2.
Questions:

Insurance plans

Q: 1) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax and whether the plan is relevant for imputed income. A: Q: A: Q: 3) For each of the plans from the insurance and miscellaneous categories defined, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the coverage amount: age, salary, length of service, any customer defined criteria. A: Q: A: Q: 5) For each option, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: 250 MasterData.doc 4) For each option, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount. 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

ValueSAP -

Q: 6) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits. A: Q: 7) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs. A: Q: 8) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any insurance plan? If so, when is it required? A: Q: 9) Are there any coverage limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the limits defined? A:

22.1.3.
Questions:

Savings plans

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax. A: Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. A: Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage of the employee contribution. A: 251 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 6) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of service). Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan. A: Q: 7) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example, mutual funds, stock, and so on). A: Q: 8) Are any of your savings plans retirement plans? Is it necessary to calculate seniority for these plans? Explanation: The SAP System supports the cumulation of pensionable earnings and hours as well as the storage of seniority information. While projected retirement benefits must be calculated by a third party administrator, seniority can be calculated either in the SAP System (partial TPA scenario) or by a third party administrator (full TPA scenario). Describe the process of calculating seniority and retirement benefits in your organization. In case of a partial TPA scenario, describe in detail the rules for determining seniority. rules for determining seniority. A: Q: 9) Are there any contribution limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the limits defined? A: Q: 10) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodical bonus? A:

22.1.4.
Questions:

Stock purchase plans

Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax. A:

252 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. A: Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage of the employee contribution. A: Q: 6) For each plan, determine whether contributions are defined on the basis of a regular period, for example, monthly or as a target amount for a fixed period. A: Q: 7) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodical bonus? A:

22.1.5.
Questions:

Spending accounts

Q: 1) What do you do with any balance existing either after a termination, or at the close of the year? A: Q: 2) For each spending account, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: A: Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: 3) For each spending account, identify the annual maximum and minimum contribution.

22.1.6.
Questions:

Credit plans

253 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: A: 2) For each plan, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.

22.1.7.
Questions:

Miscellaneous plans

Q: 1) For each plan, decide which of the following attributes are relevant: costs, credits, coverage, employee contribution, employer contribution, vesting, investments. A: Q: A: Q: 3) If costs are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: 4) If costs are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits. A: Q: 5) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs. A: Q: 6) If credits are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: Q: A: Q: 8) If coverage is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the coverage amount: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria. A: 254 MasterData.doc 7) If credits are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits. 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

9) If coverage is relevant, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.

Q: 10) If employee contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer defined criteria. A: Q: 11) If employee contribution is relevant, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. A: Q: 12) If employee contribution is relevant, specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax. A: Q: 13) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units. A: Q: 14) If employer contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customerdefined criteria. A: Q: 15) If employer contribution is relevant, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as percentage of the employee contribution. A: Q: 16) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of service). Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan. A: Q: 17) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example, mutual funds, stock, and so on). A: 255 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

23.
23.1.

Personnel Time Management

Work Schedules
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Introduction 1) In which way is the Working Hours Decree implemented in your organization.

Explanation: For each group of employees, the time management requirements are based on certain expectations. These expectations must be defined in the form of work schedules for each of the groups of employees. This includes the description of possible deviations from these expectations. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Describe the daily shifts. Specify start and end times, planned working hours and breaks for each of these daily shifts. How do public holidays affect these daily shifts? A: Q: 6) Identify similar shifts (for example, early, day, night, flex) and patterns, (for example, rotating, non-rotating). A: Q: 7) Do you have rules that change your daily shifts (for example, the last working day before a holiday ends at noon)? Provide a list of such rules. A: Q: 8) Do you have part-time workers? How do you reflect that they are part-time? (A shift is defined as part-time 8 hours on three days in the week, and they are assigned a percentage of a full time shift, such as 50%). A: 256 MasterData.doc 4) Which patterns do your shifts use? For example, weekly, monthly, rotating. 3) Name your shifts. The following points will help you to define your shifts.

ValueSAP -

23.2.

Personnel Time Specifications Administration

Questions: Q: 1) How does your organization calculate/express absenteeism due to illness and notification frequency? A: Q: 2) Please describe the process of sickness and recovery notification and indicate which information is provided and how. A: Q: 3) Does your organization make use of notifications of sickness and recovery? If so, to whom are they sent? A: Q: 4) You must identify rules and policies, as they determine the kind of time data you collect. What kind of data is collected? For example, do you need to record attendances, absences, the time of day, and elapsed times? A: Q: 5) Describe the different types of substitutions used in your company (such as a substitution for a particular period of working time, or for a specific position or personnel number). A: Q: 6) Describe the different types of availability/on-call duties used in your company (such as on-call for maintenance, on-call for emergencies). A: Q: 7) Describe the different types of attendances and absences used in your company (such as vacation, sick, business meeting). A: Q: 8) Into which categories can the identified attendances and absences be placed?

Explanation: "What are the categories into which the identified attendances and absences can be placed? Examples of possible criteria used to categorize your attendances and absences are - costing and financial information - payment relevance - internal and external reporting, statistics. " A: 257 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

9) Explain the reasons for the identified categories.

Q: 10) For each attendance and absence, identify the amount and unit of time that can be taken. Do you have attendances or absences of less than one day, one full day, or longer than one day (up to a specified maximum)? A: Q: 11) There are various priorities for different attendances and absences. Therefore, you must set the reaction for an overlap (for example if an employee gets sick on vacation). How do you handle an overlap between attendances and absences? A: Q: A: Q: A: 13) Which of the identified absences are paid? How are they paid? 12) Which of the identified absences are unpaid?

23.3.

Personnel Time Accounts Administration

Questions: Q: 1) Some attendances and absences affect time accounts, such as entitlements and accruals. What accounts do you have, and how are they affected by specific attendances and/or absences? A: Q: 2) What time accounts do you need? What time data is necessary for each account? How often do you calculate the values for these accounts? A: Q: 3) What accounts do you need for statistical evaluation purposes (for example, all absences, absences due to sickness, absences due to vacation, etc.)? A: Q: 4) What accounts do you need to evaluate vacations? (Note: entitlement accrual is addressed in process group 3. Entitlement compensation is addressed in process group 9.) A:

258 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) Time account data may be required for reporting purposes outside of HR. For example, the total number of paid absence hours accrued in a particular period may be of relevance to the Controlling department. A: Q: A: 6) Do you have any other accounts? How are they handled?

23.4.

Personnel Time Recording Subsystem

Questions: Q: 1) Capture of time management data for a particular employee with particular characteristics (interfaces to subsystems, direct entry, etc.). A: Q: 2) What kind of time events do you use (for example, clock-in, clock-out, start of break, end of break, start of off-site work, end of off-site work, etc.)? A: Q: 3) Do certain time events apply to certain groups of employees, or are all time events valid for all employees? A: Q: 4) Do your time recording processes include the identification of a reason for particular time event? What are these reasons? A: Q: 5) Do these reasons have an effect on additional processing (generation of attendances, absences)? Is there an approval process for the continued processing of an attendance or absence? A:

24.
24.1.

Training and Event Management

Cost Item
Questions: Q: A: 1) Please define the cost elements that you require.

259 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

24.2.

Business Event Location

Questions: Q: A: 1) Are business events held at more than one location? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) If there is more than one business event location, do you need to define a location hierarchy? A:

24.3.

Business Event Group

Questions: Q: A: 1) Define the business event hierarchy for the business event catalog of the customer.

24.4.

Business Event Type

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) How is the price of a business event determined? 1) Which information should be stored for the business event type?

24.5.

Resource Type

Questions: Q: 1) Are rooms already available for the business events, or are external resources accessed? A: Q: 2) Do the resources only consist of rooms, or do you want to use the system to manage other resources too, such as beamers and overhead projectors? A: Q: A: 260 MasterData.doc 3) Have the rooms been equipped differently?

ValueSAP Q: A: 4) Do rooms need to be locked because of maintenance work? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Should the instructors be managed in the system? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) Are the instructors employees at the enterprise, or are they also external persons?

Q: A:

Q: A: Q: A:

7) Should notification be sent to instructors?

24.6.

Attendee Types

Questions: Q: A: 1) Which attendee types do you want to use?

24.7.

Organizer Types

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Which information must be stored for the organizer? 1) Is there more than one organizer at your enterprise?

25.

HR Funds and Position Management

Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to post payroll results to your Funds Management system, and create personnel commitments? Explanation: If the answer is "No", refer to the point "Integration with HR Master Data (Personnel Administration) and Organizational Management". If the answer is "Yes", refer to the point "Additional Integration with Funds Management and Payroll". A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 261

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

25.1. Integration with HR Master Data and Organizational Management

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Is your budget hierarchy actually a hierarchical structure? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Which hierarchy levels does your overall budget contain for personnel expenditure? 1) For which time frame do you create your overall budget?

Q:

Explanation: Provide a list of the various levels (and give the following information on each). Name of the level - Is it a summarization level? - Budgeting using FTEs or monetary values? How the hierarchy levels are structured - How the hierarchy levels are structured A: Q: 4) Which pay scale classifications do you use in your overall budget?

Explanation: These pay scale details can be used to determine the monetary values of the funds and also to classify employees and positions (see Organizational Management). A: Q: 5) Do you have any time-limited budgets in your overall budget (e.g. funds from third parties)? A:

25.2. Additional Integration to Funds Management and to Person

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Is your budget hierarchy actually a hierarchical structure? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Which hierarchy levels does your overall budget contain for personnel expenditure? 262 1) For which time frame do you create your overall budget?

Q: MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Provide a list of the various levels (and give the following information on each): Name of the level - Is it a summarization level? - How the hierarchy levels are structured A: Q: 4) Are there any sources of financing that only provide funds for specific types of personnel expenditure? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Provide a list of all expenditure wage types (see posting to accounting).

Q:

Explanation: Group the expenditure wage types (don't forget to apply any restrictions imposed by the sources of financing). For example, third-party funds can be used to finance mandatory social contributions, but not voluntary social contributions. In this case, you would group the expenditure wage types for mandatory social contributions separately from the expenditure eage types for voluntary social contributions. Please note that the wage types are financed and posted according to the group they are in. the group they are in. A: Q: 6) Does the personnel expenditure contained in the pay scale classification (default record) come from different sources? Explanation: Example: The social expenditure contained in the default value table are financed from other sources. are financed from other sources. are financed from other sources. A: Q: 7) What is the % distribution of this expenditure? This will give you the distribution key of the default record. A: Q: 8) Which pay scale classifications do you use?

Explanation: These pay scale details can be used to classify employees and positions (see Organizational Management). A:

263 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

26.
26.1.

Core Interface - Integration Model

Master Data
Supplier 26.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Based on the suppliers you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A:

26.1.2.
Questions:

Customer

Q: 1) Based on the customers you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A:

26.1.3.
Questions:

Plant

Q: 1) Based on the plants you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A:

26.1.4.
Questions:

Distribution Center

Q: 1) Based on the distribution centers you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A:

26.1.5.
Questions:

Material Master / Product

Q: 1) Based on the products you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. Explanation: Please consider that all products / materials that are produced on one resource, that is planned in APO, need to be represented as well in APO. A: Q: A: 264 MasterData.doc 2) Do you have many inactive materials in your material master?

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) Is there a high redundancy in your material master (the same product appears under different material numbers in the system)? A:

26.1.6.
Questions:

Work Center / Production Resources

Q: 1) Based on the resources you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Please state the normal quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 5) Please state the maximum quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 6) Does the quantity capacity of the resource vary with time? Please explain your shift and break models. Are these models identical for all days? Do these models have specified validity periods? A: Q: A: Q: 8) What is the percentage relationship between productive time and available working time? A: Q: 9) What alternative scenarios of available working time are conceivable for this resource? (Simulation) A: 265 MasterData.doc 7) Please specify the conversion rule between the alternative units of measure! 3) How many units of this type of resource are available? 2) What are your production resource types ?

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) Please specify the resource costs, with respect to the different units of measure for quantity capacity! Please give numbers for the normal capacity utilization and maximum capacity utilization. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) Is it necessary to complete all components before you can start a successor operation? Are there time buffers considered? A: Q: 14) Describe the availability of your resources. Are there season-dependent ranges? (Interval) A: Q: A: Q: 16) Who will be responsible for each resource, which resources should be visible for which planner ? A: Q: A: 17) Please define shift plans for your resources. 15) Do you want to use different versions of capacity models for your resources? 12) Do you want to consider the existing capacity loads for each resource? 11) Do you restrict the capacity for one resource (rates, operations, overload, quantity)?

26.1.7.
Questions:

Work Center / Transportation Resources

Q: 1) Based on the resources you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A: Q: A: 266 MasterData.doc 2) Which transport resources are utilized for which shipment relation?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) How many units of this type of resource are available?

Q: 4) Please state the normal quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 5) Please state the maximum quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 6) Does the quantity capacity of the resource vary with time? Please explain your shift and break models. Are these models identical for all days? Do these models have specified validity periods? A: Q: A: Q: 8) What is the percentage relationship between productive time and available working time? A: Q: 9) What alternative scenarios of available working time are conceivable for this resource? (Simulation) A: Q: 10) Please specify the resource costs, with respect to the different units of measure for quantity capacity! Please give numbers for the normal capacity utilization and maximum capacity utilization. A: Q: A: Q: A: 12) Do you want to consider the existing capacity loads for each resource? 11) Do you restrict the capacity for one resource (rates, operations, overload, quantity)? 7) Please specify the conversion rule between the alternative units of measure!

267 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 13) Is it necessary to complete all components before you can start a successor operation? Are there time buffers considered? A: Q: 14) Describe the availability of your resources. Are there season-dependent ranges? (Interval) A: Q: A: Q: 16) Who will be responsible for each resource, which resources should be visible for which planner ? A: Q: A: 17) Please define shift plans for your resources. 15) Do you want to use different versions of capacity models for your resources?

26.1.8.
Questions:

Work Center / Handling Resources

Q: 1) Based on the resources you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Please state the normal quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 5) Please state the maximum quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: 3) How many units of this type of resource are available? 2) What are your handling resource types ?

268 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 6) Does the quantity capacity of the resource vary with time? Please explain your shift and break models. Are these models identical for all days? Do these models have specified validity periods? A: Q: A: Q: 8) What is the percentage relationship between productive time and available working time? A: Q: 9) What alternative scenarios of available working time are conceivable for this resource? (Simulation) A: Q: 10) Please specify the resource costs, with respect to the different units of measure for quantity capacity! Please give numbers for the normal capacity utilization and maximum capacity utilization. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) Is it necessary to complete all components before you can start a successor operation? Are there time buffers considered? A: Q: 14) Describe the availability of your resources. Are there season-dependent ranges? (Interval) A: Q: A: Q: 16) Who will be responsible for each resource, which resources should be visible for which planner ? 269 MasterData.doc 15) Do you want to use different versions of capacity models for your resources? 12) Do you want to consider the existing capacity loads for each resource? 11) Do you restrict the capacity for one resource (rates, operations, overload, quantity)? 7) Please specify the conversion rule between the alternative units of measure!

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 17) Please define shift plans for your resources.

26.1.9.
Questions:

Work Center / Storage Resources

Q: 1) Based on the resources you mentioned in the Strategy part please identify the ones you would like to be represented in APO. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Please state the normal quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: Q: 9) Please state the maximum quantity capacity (in two alternative units of measure, if possible) for one resource unit. A: 270 MasterData.doc 7) How many units of this type of resource are available? 6) What are your storage resource types ? 5) Can for storage purposes different products be mixed on the same pallet? 4) Do you store only complete pallets? 3) What is the consumption of storage resources? 2) What is the storage capacity of your various distribution centres and storehouses?

ValueSAP Q: 10) Does the quantity capacity of the resource vary with time? Please explain your shift and break models. Are these models identical for all days? Do these models have specified validity periods? A: Q: A: Q: 12) What is the percentage relationship between productive time and available working time? A: Q: 13) What alternative scenarios of available working time are conceivable for this resource? (Simulation) A: Q: 14) Please specify the resource costs, with respect to the different units of measure for quantity capacity! Please give numbers for the normal capacity utilization and maximum capacity utilization. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 17) Is it necessary to complete all components before you can start a successor operation? Are there time buffers considered? A: Q: 18) Describe the availability of your resources. Are there season-dependent ranges? (Interval) A: Q: A: Q: 20) Who will be responsible for each resource, which resources should be visible for which planner ? 271 MasterData.doc 19) Do you want to use different versions of capacity models for your resources? 16) Do you want to consider the existing capacity loads for each resource? 15) Do you restrict the capacity for one resource (rates, operations, overload, quantity)? 11) Please specify the conversion rule between the alternative units of measure!

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 21) Please define shift plans for your resources.

26.1.10.
Questions:

Production Process Model

Q: 1) Please identify which routings (PP) or recipes (PI) you would like to be represented in APO. A:

26.2.

Misc.
Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling

26.2.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Specify, which of the relevant Master Data objects should be transferred to APO, when you define your supply network. Explanation: A: Q: 2) Define your strategy to maintain and update the relevant integration models for Transportation Management. Which data objects should be updated periodically? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Do you want to use transportation planning and load consolidation?

Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you want to use vehicle scheduling and route determination in a dynamic environment? Explanation: A:

272 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) Did you hand-over so far transportation planning to external carriers?

Explanation: A: Q: 6) Do you consolidate your freights with your transportation resources by yourself?

Explanation: A: Q: 7) Did you implement Transportation Planning in the way of an transportation forecast in your company? Explanation: A: Q: 8) Did you implement Vehicle Scheduling and Simulation in a mid term planning in your company? Explanation: A: Q: 9) Who is responsible for transportation management in your company? Is there a possibility for partners to influence your planning? Explanation: A: Q: 10) Do you execute transportation planning in a external optimzer? Do you want to replace this process by using APO? Explanation: A: Q: 11) Do you want to integrate your own transfer logic to specify relevant settings in Master Data. (predefine settings in APO during data transfer to APO)? Explanation: A: 273 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

27.
27.1.

APO Master Data

Supply Chain Cockpit
Transportation Lanes 27.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Please make detailed statements about shipment relations between locations of your Supply Chain, focussing on APO-relevant products and product categories. Identify per product category which Supply Chain model is affected . A: Q: 2) Are there alternative shipment relations for certain products? What are the criteria to choose between them? A: Q: 3) For each shipment relation and product, please define alternative modes of transportation (truck, rail, ship etc.) and prioritize them. A: Q: A: Q: 5) For the different shipment relations, how many units of the different transport resources are available? A: Q: 6) For all shipment relations and transportation modes, please give the transportation duration (in days and hours). A: 4) Are transportation modes only available during certain time intervals?

27.2. Network Design Relevant Master Data/Transactional Data

27.2.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Does a long-term demand plan exist?

Demand

Explanation: A: 274 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) Do you want to simulate different demand scenarios?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Do you use Demand Planning and Network Design for the same planning horizon?

Explanation: A:

27.2.2.
Questions: Q:

Location

1) Please specify the costs you consider when planning locations.

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Do you consider existing locations only? Are there potential new locations in your future supply chain? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please specify the operating, closing and opening costs / incentives for locations being considered! Are these costs / incentives limited in time? Explanation: A: Q: 4) What is your mean delivery frequency in a location?

Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do you expect bottlenecks by usage of inbound or outbound handling resources? Specify the capacity of these resources. Explanation: 275 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

27.2.3.
Questions: Q:

Location Product

1) What units do you use in general to describe a product?

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Should forecasted demand always be served by the supply chain? Please specify the lost profits for not delivered demand. Explanation: A: Q: 3) Is demand (primary or secondary demand) always met by production or transportation? Are some components / final goods procured externally? What is the mean price of the products externally procured? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Specify the storage costs per day and the mean time a certain product is on stock.

Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do costs arise in the goods receipts / goods issue process?

Explanation: A: Q: 6) Are there upper levels for the delivery time of a product ( e.g. a product should always be delivered in two days)? Explanation: A:

276 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 7) If handling capacity is limited (inbound or outbound), how much of this capacity is consumed by one base unit of a product? Explanation: A: Q: 8) What is the mean number of production processes per week seen over the planning horizon? Explanation: A:

27.2.4.
Questions: Q:

Resources

1) What different types of resources do you use (production, handling,...)?

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Specify the capacity of these resources.

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Could capacities be enhanced causing additional costs?

Explanation: A:

27.2.5.
Questions:

Production Process Models

Q: 1) Do you need to model processes where demand is met by production? How is the procurement of the components performed? Explanation: A:

277 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Are there processes where a product is converted (packed, unpacked)? Are the various forms of a product (pallets, boxes,...) handled differently (different demand, different procurement, different transportation,...)? Explanation: A: Q: 3) How much of the components is needed to produce a certain amount of a product?

Explanation: A: Q: 4) What is the cost structure of these processes? Are the costs proportional to the quantity of the products? Could larger quantities be processed with lower costs per base unit? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Specify the capacity consumption of the resources involved in these processes.

Explanation: A:

27.2.6.
Questions: Q:

Transportation Lanes

1) Specify the transportation lanes which could possibly be used to transport products.

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Are there different transportation modes possible for one lane (truck, train, plane, ship, ...)? Explanation: A: Q: 3) What is the cost structure of the transportation processes? Are the costs proportional to the quantity of the products? Could larger quantities be transported with lower costs per base unit? 278 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A:

27.3.

Transportation Planning
Planning Objects - Key figures

27.3.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Which key figures for each transportation category will you use? Can you define universal sets of key figures for business units? Will there be more than transporation zone, transportation lane, transportation type and carrier? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Which key figures should be aggregated in sum, on average and which key figures should not be aggregated at all? Which key figures should be disaggregated based on another key figure? Explanation: A: Q: 3) In which units do you plan? Is it acceptable to have only one standard unit (like tons..) in demand planning/transportation planning? Explanation: A:

27.3.2.
Questions:

Planning Objects - Characteristics

Q: 1) Please define the most detailed set of characteristics relevant for storing demand planning data with respect to business units! Is it useful to operate with a universal set of characteristics for all business units? Do you frequently access data at a higher level of aggregation? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Can you structure your basic characteristic along dimensions?

Explanation: 279 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 3) For those characteristics that are dependent from each other list them in a hierarchical structure. Explanation: A: Q: 4) For the characteristics defined in the above questions please specify the values (e.g. Regions: Western, Eastern, Northern, Southern or transportation zone etc.). Explanation: A: Q: 5) What are your distribution channels?

Explanation: A:

27.3.3.
Questions:

Info Cubes / Planning Area

Q: 1) Do you want to use common info cubes for different business units or should each business unit have its own info cube(s)? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Is it acceptable that all your transportation forecast planning data is stored in one standard unit? If not, please specify what would be required! Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please help in estimating the number of characteristic combinations relevant to transportation planning for each business unit or transportation zone or transportation lane! Explanation: A: Q: MasterData.doc 4) Do you have the SAP Business Warehouse installed or plan to do so? 280

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 5) For which key figures do you want to see information at a very detailed level in transportation forecast planning? Explanation: A: Q: 6) Do you frequently access data at a certain level of aggregation? What key figures are important at this aggregation level? Explanation: A:

27.3.4.
Questions:

Time buckets

Q: 1) Define the relevant time buckets for viewing transportation planning data across the planning horizon (past and future)! Explanation: A: Q: 2) Can these buckets vary with product groups or other categories?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) What are the relevant time buckets for SNP planning?

Explanation: A:

27.3.5.
Questions:

Planning Book / Data View

Q: 1) Can you specify universal sets of key figures that are relevant to corresponding groups of transportation planners in the sense that all planners in one group want to see intersecting subsets of key figures from one set in transportation planning? 281 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 2) What are the planable characteristics relevant to each group of demand planners?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Do you apply "frozen zones" in your future horizon where transportation planning data must not be revised any more? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you want to see historical data in demand planning? What kind of historical data is relevant? Should this data be displayed in past time buckets or rather in recent and future time buckets? Explanation: A: Q: 5) If you prefer to see historical time buckets, should historical data and forecasted data be written to different key figures (rows)? Explanation: A: Q: 6) Please describe the general structure of your planning tables in long-term transportation planning! Explanation: A: Q: 7) Please specify your future and past planning horizon and give detailed account of the time buckets you want to use in the past and future horizon! Is this decision valid for all planners and product categories/transportation groups? Explanation: A: 282 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 8) In your current planning tool, do you use macros? Please give details of these macro calculations! At which level of aggregation are the macros executed? Explanation: A: Q: 9) Does the layout vary with planner, product group or any other criterion (such as transportation groups)? Explanation: A: Q: 10) Please define the different planning books you want to set up.

Explanation: A:

27.3.6.
Questions:

Forecast Profiles

Q: 1) What is the first day of your planning horizon? Do you always start with the current date ? Explanation: A: Q: 2) What is the most detailed time bucket where you can provide historical data? Does this bucket vary with product categories or business units? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Do you want to base your forecasts on the mentioned time bucket or a coarser data level? Explanation: A: Q: 4) On how many consecutive past periods do you want to base your forecast? Does this statement vary with product categories or business units? 283 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 5) For which areas or product groups do you feel that significant structural change in your company or the business environment limits the number of historical time buckets that can be used as the basis for an actual forecast? Explanation: A: Q: 6) How many planning periods should be planned in future periods? Does this statement vary with transportation method or area? Explanation: A: Q: 7) Do you want to exclude alerts from univariate forecasting or MLR-forecasting?

Explanation: A: Q: 8) Univariate Profile: Please state key figure and planning version of the historical data you want to base your forecast upon. Explanation: A: Q: 9) What kind of data corrections should be applied by the system to historical time series before the forecast is carried out (promotion deduction, workdays correction, outlier correction, ignoring zero consumption)? What is the number of workdays of a representative time bucket (month, week)? Explanation: A: Q: 10) Univariate Forecasting: What are relevant forecast errors for you? Can you specify ranges for "acceptable" error levels? Does this statement vary for product groups or business units? Explanation: 284 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 11) MLR-Profile: Please state key figure and planning version of the historical data you want to base your forecast upon. Explanation: A: Q: 12) Please state time series (explicitly, or by reference to key figures of an infocube) of factors which seem to determine demand. Explanation: A: Q: 13) What are relevant forecast errors for you? Can you specify ranges for "acceptable" error levels? Does this statement vary for product groups or business units? Explanation: A:

27.3.7.
Questions: Q:

Transfer Transportation Forecast to Carrier Selection

1) What is your time bucket in Carrier Selection? (for instance, weeks or months)

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Please define the time horizon for which data should be released from Transportation Planning to Carrier Selection. Explanation: A: Q: 3) When you transfer forecasted demand from TP to Carrier Selection, should this add to previously released demand, or should old demand be simply replaced? Explanation: A: 285 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) In interactive planning, do you want to see a list of results after transferring forecasted demand? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Before you transfer your forecast, do want to discuss the planning results with your business partners? Explanation: A: Q: 6) What is your way to splitt aggregated forecast to assign it to separate carriers?

Explanation: A: Q: 7) Would you like to split the planned total demand for transportation methods between individual locations (in particular, distribution centers or lanes) using a predefined scheme? Explanation: A: Q: 8) How stable is this repartition?

Explanation: A: Q: 9) How often are you going to change this repartition?

Explanation: A:

27.4.

Supply Network Planning Master Data

Info Cubes / Planning Area

27.4.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan on location-product level in SNP or would you like to include some extra characteristic? 286 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: A: Q: 2) Do you want to run reporting functionality on SNP data? Have you got the SAP Business Warehouse installed? Explanation: A:

27.4.2.
Questions:

Planning Book / Data View

Q: 1) Please describe the general structure of your planning tables in interactive supply network planning, interactive transportation capacity planning as well as interactive planning for VMI customers! Explanation: A: Q: 2) Does the layout vary with planner, transportation category or any other criterion (such as transportation lane)? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please specify your future planning horizon and give detailed account of the time buckets you want to use! Is this decision valid for all planners and transportationcategories? Explanation: A: Q: 4) In your current planning tool, do you use macros? Please give details of these macro calculations! At which level of aggregation are the macros executed? Explanation: A:

27.4.3.
Questions:

Demand Profile

Q: 1) In planning production and transportation, do you want to take stock and stock in transit into account or not? 287 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Within what time-horizon starting from the current date can customer demand be viewed as certain? Please define a horizon when the forecast is not considered as part of total demand (forecast horizon). Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please state the maximum time difference between a demand and the supply that covers this demanld! When should late supply lead to an alert? How much prior to the demand can the supply be received? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Please specify the underdelivery and overdelivery tolerance for each product category. Explanation: A: Q: 5) Specify the number of workdays allocated as lead time to cover a VMI customer's product promotion. Explanation: A:

27.4.4.
Questions:

Supply Profile

Q: 1) Do you want to differentiate between your short, middle and long term planning based on the supply key figures? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Please specify the time-horizon where you want to perform a detailed transportation planning. 288 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please specify how many days in the future you would like to perform detailed transportation planning! Explanation: A:

27.4.5.
Questions: Q:

Inventory Policies (Lot size profile)

1) Please define for each product category your min / max days of coverage.

Explanation: A: Q: 2) What is your current replenishment frequency?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) What is your targeted replenishment frequency?

Explanation: A: Q: 4) Give minimum target days of supply for your distribution centres and storage locations! Explanation: A: Q: 5) What is your customer service level for each product category?

Explanation: A: Q: MasterData.doc 6) Can you supply historic data on planned and realized delivery time? 289

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A:

27.4.6.
Questions:

Transportation Policy (Lot size profile)

Q: 1) Please state the lot size strategy in transportation (minimum and maximum lot size, fixed lot size, exact lot size, rounding profiles or rounding values). Explanation: A: Q: 2) What percentage of assembly scrap and loss in transportation must be taken into consideration? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Should the lot size profile be applied to sales orders also?

Explanation: A:

27.4.7.
Questions:

Time Streams

Q: 1) For each location, please give the calendars for production, distribution, and warehouse! Explanation: A: Q: 2) What are the relevant time zones of your locations?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Please define your calendars for production, storage, handling and transportation resources! (working days, hours per day) 290 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: A: Q: 4) How far into the past and into the future should calendars reach?

Explanation: A:

27.4.8.
Questions: Q:

Time Buckets and Horizon

1) What is your current planning horizon?

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Please define the required time granularity (time buckets) within Supply Network Planning! The granularity may vary across the horizon. Explanation: A:

27.5.

Vehicle Scheduling and Freight Consolidation

Locations

27.5.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you plan shipments in your "internal" network? Which locations are included? Specify plants, distribution centres, consolidation points, as well as suppliers and VMIcustomers, which are integrated in your supply network. Explanation: A: Q: 2) Do you want to plan shipments outside this internal network? Specify which customers, suppliers or other locations should be considered. Explanation: A:

291 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Is it possible to group this locations geographically? Could you aggregate these locations in a hierarchy? (for instance country/state/zip-code) Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you want to plan shipments to locations, which are different than the ship-to address in an order? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do you have time limitations on customers or supplier side (Opening hours)?

Explanation: A: Q: 6) Are there loading or unloading capacity constraints in some distributions centres or plants or at customer side? Explanation: A: Q: 7) Are there location specific loading or unloading times/durations?

Explanation: A: Q: 8) Do think some locations or customers require to be the first or the last leg in a multidrop shipment? Explanation: A: Q: 9) Do think some customers require to ship their goods separate from goods to other customers? Explanation: A: 292 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) Could you specify priorities between customers or your own locations in terms of being late or early? Explanation: A:

27.5.2.
Questions: Q:

Carrier

1) Can you specify a list of your carriers? Are they specific to certain areas?

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Do you schedule shipments with carriers as continous moves?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Can you specify a list of preferred carriers in a certain area or for certain customers? Would it be possible, that some carriers are excluded for some shipments? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you actually schedule/plan your carriers equipment? Are there capacity agreements with some carriers per week or day? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do some of your carriers schedule your shipments or deliveries?

Explanation: A: Q: 6) Do these carriers handle only specific orders or materials?

Explanation: 293 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 7) Do you want to schedule inbound and outbound transport seperatly? Maybe with your own fleet? Explanation: A:

27.5.3.
Questions:

Transportation Lanes

Q: 1) Do you need very specific information about distances between customers, suppliers, plants and distribution centers? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Are there only specific transportation modes relevant for some lanes, like ships or planes for intercontinental shipments? Explanation: A: Q: 3) Could you give a list for pre-scheduled transportation modes (schedules for ships)? Are there alternative transportation methods possible? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Are all lanes bi-directional or are some of them limited to outbound or inbound?

Explanation: A: Q: 5) Describe the way transportation influences the availability of goods in your supply chain. Explanation: A:

294 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 27.5.4.
Questions: Q: 1) Do you schedule shipments with your own fleet? Would there be a priority using your own trucks vs. using external resources? Explanation: A: Q: 2) Can you group certain resources in categories (big trucks, small trucks)?

Resources

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Do you distinguish between full truck loads and less than full truck loads?

Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you have the need to specify each transportation resource in terms of capacity and availability. Is it important for you, the have a detailed schedules per each shipment? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do you have parcel shipments? Do you want to track these parcels? Are there existing partnerships to certain carriers? Explanation: A: Q: 6) Are there reasons to separate products from one order into different trucks?

Explanation: A: Q: 7) Do some of your business partners or some of your own locations have specific requirements regarding the used vehicles? Explanation: 295 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 8) Can you give time constraints regarding the used vehicles (driver times or season)?

Explanation: A: Q: 9) Are some resources limited to schedules?

Explanation: A: Q: 10) Are some resources/equipment limited to some carriers?

Explanation: A: Q: 11) Are there incompatibilities between some products and some of the resources?

Explanation: A: Q: 12) Which dimensions limit the capacity of your resources? (weight, volume, length, width, number of pallets,...) Explanation: A: Q: 13) Is the loading and unloading time specific to the used vehicle?

Explanation: A: Q: 14) Do you have multi-pick and -drop shipments?

Explanation: A: 296 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

15) Do you want to group products which have the same transportation requirements?

Explanation: A:

27.5.5.
Questions: Q:

Cost Profiles

1) Please specify penalties for early and late deliveries per each transportation type.

Explanation: A: Q: 2) Do you prefer full truck loads vs. less than full truck loads?

Explanation: A: Q: 3) Specify your way to combine orders to one shipment. Are there other reasons than costs for distance and weight and time restrictions? Explanation: A: Q: 4) Do you think the transportation costs would influence the way to consolidate your orders to shipments, when you would use another carrier? Explanation: A: Q: 5) Do you want to change these costs, to meet the customers' required delivery dates?

Explanation: A:

28. Business Planning and Simulation (Master Data SEM-BPS)

297 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

28.1.

Master Data Hierarchy

Questions: Q: 1) Have you filed master data hierarchies for specific characteristics in the form of files, the contents of which you want to transfer for these characteristics? Explanation: Specify the characteristics for which you want to transfer hierarchies as well as the hierarchies themselves and their sources. A:

28.2.

Comments

Questions: Q: 1) Specify the comments which should be transferred.

Explanation: Specify: - origin - target object (reports, fixed characteristics, characteristics, basis key figures, key figures, master data, portfolio reports) A:

29. Business Consolidation (Master Data SEMBCS)

29.1. Cons Chart of Accounts/Hierarchy thereof
Questions: Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, German HGB)? Explanation: A dimension can accommodate multiple consolidation charts of accounts. This enables you to simultaneously create statements to meet different accounting requirements. A: Q: 2) Are you planning parallel accounting using different accounting principles/rules (e.g., US GAAP and IAS)? A: Q: 3) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement? A: Q: 4) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? 298 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: WARNING: Additional settings will become necessary in FI and/or CO ! A: Q: 5) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 6) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?

Explanation: How is the data reported - as accounts or as financial statement items? A: Q: 7) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: These types of classifications are portrayed with the field Item Category. This field might contain the values "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: Q: 8) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: If you work in an integrated system, see the chapter on Integration. A: Q: 9) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: - Annual net income - balance sheet - Annual net income - income statement Deferred taxes - balance sheet - Deferred taxes - income statement - Balancing adjustment item - Earnings carryforward item A:

29.2.

Breakdown Categories

Questions: Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting? Which differing detail information do you want to see within a consolidation chart of accounts?

299 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: The breakdown category controls the item details you desire. The standard system contains the following detail options: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition - Subitem - up to five additional custom characteristics A: Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? Explanation: Splitting of differences requires that the item be broken down by transaction currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

29.3.

Custom Characteristics

Questions: Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standard subassignments? Explanation: Please note: - Cross-client settings - Because the database will be extended, these settings should be made at the beginning of the project (requires an empty database). Subsequent changes are extremely problematic. The use of custom characteristics, such as Product Group, can reduce the number of consolidation units. Thus, you should gain a clear understanding of the advantages and disadvantages of the conversion over consolidation units or over custom characteristics. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes, how many and which characteristics?

Q:

Explanation: - Number of characteristics - Which characteristic values A:

29.4.

Subitem Categories

Questions: Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you have for group reporting later on (for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports, segment reports, etc.)? Explanation: An example of the options: - asset transaction type - functional area - region year of acquisition - period - equity transaction type A:

300 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

29.5.

Subitems

Questions: Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - subitem category Asset Transaction Type, numeric values 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own values? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which subitems do you want to use as carryforward subitems for the carryforward program? A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

29.6.

Sets (Namespace)

Questions: Q: 1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of elements whose content are similar. Sets are needed in various areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination, or in reporting. Defining suitable names upfront makes working with sets easier later on. A:

30.
30.1.

Business-to-Business Procurement
Business partner
External User 30.1.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Will the users be allowed to create their own User ID's? If yes, will the creation of new User ID's require approval? A: Q: 3) If no, how do you want to assign User ID's? 301 1) How many users do you have or anticipate having?

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 5) Typically default settings for a User in Business-to-Business Procurement are configured based on a questionnaire that the user completes at the time they create the User ID. On what basis do you want to create the questionnaire? A: Q: 6) What questions will the user have to answer when creating a new User ID in order to be assigned to the correct organizational unit? A: Q: A: Q: 8) What roles and activities do you have in the procurement process? (e.g. requisitioner, buyer, approver, etc.) A: Q: 9) Do you have anyone that performs multiple roles? If yes, list the multiple roles an employee might perform. A: Q: 10) Will the Business-to-Business activity groups support the existing roles? If yes, what activity groups will be assigned to the users? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) Will you allow vendors to create User ID's in the Business-to-Business Procurement system for the purpose of invoicing, confirmations, and bidding? A: 302 MasterData.doc 12) Which managers approve new users for which organizational unit? 11) Does a manager need to approve the creation of a new user? 7) What parameters are assigned to the user when a new user creates an ID? 4) How many levels of approval are required for the User ID creation?

ValueSAP 30.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Will the users be allowed to create their own User ID's? If yes, will the creation of new User ID's require approval? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Typically default settings for a User in Business-to-Business Procurement are configured based on a questionnaire that the user completes at the time they create the User ID. On what basis do you want to create the questionnaire? A: Q: 6) What questions will the user have to answer when creating a new User ID in order to be assigned to the correct organizational unit? A: Q: A: Q: 8) What roles and activities do you have in the procurement process? (e.g. requisitioner, buyer, approver, etc.) A: Q: 9) Do you have anyone that performs multiple roles? If yes, list the multiple roles an employee might perform. A: Q: 10) Will the Business-to-Business activity groups support the existing roles? If yes, what activity groups will be assigned to the users? A: 303 MasterData.doc 7) What parameters are assigned to the user when a new user creates an ID? 4) How many levels of approval are required for the User ID creation? 3) If no, how do you want to assign User ID's? 1) How many users do you have or anticipate having?

Internal User

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

11) Does a manager need to approve the creation of a new user?

12) Which managers approve new users for which organizational unit?

30.2.

Product Master Data

Product master

30.2.1.
Questions: Q:

1) Are you going to transfer product data from catalogs into the B2B system?

Explanation: For this purpose different formats such as Requisite, xCBL and BMEcat are supported. The data can also be transfered from BBP into catalogs. A:

30.2.2.
Questions:

Material Master Record (Backend)

Q: 1) What department or organization is responsible for maintaining material master records if used? A: Q: 2) Are separate material master records (perhaps with a separate material type) used in the development and engineering process? How and when are they transformed into operational material master records? A:

30.2.3.
Questions:

Service master record (Backend)

Q: 1) Does your business procure services from outside vendors? If yes, do you have the need to structure and manage these services? A: Q: 2) Will you procure materials that have a service master record in the core backend system? A:

30.3.
MasterData.doc

Account Assignments
304

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Are you using the MM, FI, and CO modules within your SAP R/3 System? If no, do you have a productive system with Materials Management and Accounting functions? A: 3) Do you want to default a consumption account from the backend system? 2) Do you allow users to change account assignments? 1) What account assignments will be used within Business-to Business Procurement?

30.3.1.
Questions:

Account Assignment Types (Backend)

Q: 1) How do the departments share the task of procuring MRO, expense materials, and services required by the organization? A:

30.3.2.
Questions:

General Ledger (Backend)

Q: 1) Describe your General Ledger account structure and how the existing system determines the account assignment? A:

30.4.

Sources of Supply

Questions: Q: 1) Do you have multiple sources of supply for one material or is the user forced to procure from one supplier? A:

30.4.1.
Questions:

Purchasing Info Record (Backend)

Q: 1) If running an SAP R/3 backend system, will info records be used in the backend system for a source of supply? A: 305 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP 30.4.2.
Questions: Q: A: 1) Will contracts be used? Do these documents exist on the core backend system?

Contract (Backend)

30.5.

Number Ranges

Questions: Q: 1) Which internal number ranges are defined for requirement requests, purchase requisitions, reservations, service entry sheets? A:

30.6.

Messaging (Backend)

Questions: Q: 1) What output methods will be required following the implementation of Business-toBusiness Procurement? For example, EDI, XML messaging, etc.. If using XML, how are you currently processing XML messages? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Are there any document text items unique to the vendor other than the purchase order text? A: Q: A: 306 MasterData.doc 7) Do you have internal notes that are not printed on the purchase order? 5) What are the document text requirements for purchase orders? 4) How are you identified in your suppliers system? 3) Do you have an agreement with your partners on messaging content? 2) What business information do you currently exchange with your partners?

ValueSAP -

Q: 8) Do you have a need to attach documents or drawings to a requirement coverage request (RCR)? If yes, what are the common file types that need to be attached? A: Q: 9) Are there international commerce terms specified in your purchasing documents? For example FOB, CIF, etc. A: Q: A: Q: 11) Will there be a need to reroute workflow messages to other individuals within the company? A: Q: 12) Will the standard workflows delivered with the Business-to-Business Component support the business requirements or will there need to be enhancements made to the workflows? A: 10) What type of documents do you want to create in the backend system?

30.7.

Mail System

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Will your company use the SAP integrated email inbox or will they use an external mails system for the approvals? A: 1) What type of mail system is your company using?

31.

Questions
Questions: Q: 1) 1) Do you have a comany-wide / departmentwide master data concept that you must adhere to your SAP BW implementation? Explanation: A: 307

MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) 2) Do you have a leading master data system?

Explanation: A:

32.
32.1.

Cross-Application Master Data

Business partner
Project documentation:

00004531.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00004531.chm Questions: Q: 1) With which category of business partner do you have relationships? (For example, sole proprietor, legal person, employees, foreign company, other)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which department(s) are responsible for the maintenance of customer data? If more than one department, describe the responsibilities of each in detail? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: MasterData.doc 7) Do you maintain prospects in Sales and Distribution? 308 6) Which business partner roles are used for the different sales and service documents? 5) Describe your partner functions in detail. 3) Which active customers do you intend to transfer to your R/3 system? 2) Which customer do you intend to transfer to your CRM system ?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 17) Do you maintain customer data in an external system? 16) How will you determine/select a customer for processing (matchcode)? 15) Do you use the same structure for customer master records in all departments? 14) Describe all other data relevant to your customer master. 13) Which category of texts do you maintain at a customer level? 12) Will you record contact person information on your customers? 11) Do you group customers according to any of the following criteria? 10) Describe the structure of your current customer numbering scheme. 9) Do you have vendors who are also customers? 8) Do you have one-time customers?

309 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP -

33.
33.1.

Sales and Distribution

Product
Project documentation:

00004535.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00004535.chm Questions: Q: 1) Define which materials should be downloaded from the R/3 System into the CRM System. A:

33.2.

Product Catalog

Project documentation:

00004536.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00004536.chm Questions: Q: 1) Do you need a special Marketing description/view of your products for presence on the Internet? Describe the required structure and the definition of your product catalogue on the Internet. A: Q: 2) Do you have different product catalogues regarding language, currency, sales organizations, or validity? A: Q: A: Q: A: 4) Which attributes describe the articles in the catalogues? 3) Which articles should be contained in the catalogue?

310 MasterData.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: 6) What texts do you need at what level in the product catalogue? 5) Which documents do you need at which level in the product catalogue?

34.
34.1.

Service
Service Interaction Center
Project documentation:

00001319.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00001319.chm

00004530.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00004530.chm Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Is there master data about the caller in the system? If yes, for which part of the caller? 1) Who calls (customers, retailers)?

34.2.

Internet Service

Project documentation:

00004529.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00004529.chm Questions: Q: MasterData.doc 1) Who should use Internet Customer Self Service? 311

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2) Should it be possible to create/register a new user?

34.3.

Solution Database

Project documentation:

00002940.chm

C:\ASAP\PROJECTS\IMPLEMENTATION\QAdb\Documentation\CRM\00002940.chm Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which way should the user be able to search for solutions (free text, key words, exact search via codes)? A: Q: A: Q: 4) What groups of users work with the MSDS (Call Center Agents, service technicians, customers)? A: Q: 5) What demands does each of these groups have regarding the information contained in the MSDS (detail level of solution, technical focus, internal/external use). Are these requirements compatible or must separate MSDS be created? A: Q: A: Q: 7) How can problems be structured and categorized with help of catalogues? Check this for each of the relevant types of catalogue. If possible use already existing catalogue structures. A: 312 MasterData.doc 6) Determine employees responsible for the maintenance of MSDS master data. 3) Is the use of the MSDS in several languages planned? 1) Should it be possible to create/register a new user?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

8) According to what criteria can problems be structured in the MSDS?

9) How should a symptom be described?

10) According to which criteria can the solutions be structured in the MSDS?

Q: 11) What documents and objects should be able to be attached to a solution? (For example, drawings, URLs, Business Objects, and so on) A: Q: 12) Which restrictions have to be considered for the validity of solutions (for example, valid time period) A: Q: 13) Create a list of terms that may not be changed by the search engine (for example, names, transaction codes, and so on) A:

313 MasterData.doc